Roseville City Council
February 21, 2024

SECTION 00 31 46

PERMITS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 General Requirements
A. The requirements set forth in the General Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

B. The requirements set forth in the Supplemental Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

C. The intent of this Section is to furnish bidders with the known list of required permits for the Work under the Contract Documents. Bidders should note that the list is not necessarily complete and that additional requirements may exist or arise.

1.02 Permits
A. The Contractor shall obtain copies of the following permits from the Project Manager. Copies of these shall be obtained prior to start of work and shall be kept on the jobsite.

1. City of Roseville Department of Development Services, Encroachment Permit for all Work related to this project, if applicable.

2. City of Roseville Department of Development Services, Building Permit for all structural items associated with this project, including, but not limited to, lighting, restrooms, shade structures, drinking fountain, and miscellaneous electrical.

B. Contractor shall comply with the conditions of these permits, and will be solely responsible for all costs associated with meeting permit conditions unless specifically specified otherwise in these Contract Documents.

C. A copy of the permit is included in the Appendix of the Project Manual. A trench/excavation permit must be on file with the City. Submit a copy of the notification letter to CAL OSHA, which outlines the project, and contracted scope of work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Intentionally left blank.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 00 31 46: Permits

PART 3 - EXECUTION
Intentionally left blank.

END OF SECTION
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 General
A. The requirements set forth in the General Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

B. The requirements set forth in the Special Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

1.02 Project Description
A. Project Name and address:

Johnson Pool Renovation Project
100 D. Street, Roseville, CA 95678
B. Project description/scope of work:

The scope of this project includes accessibility upgrades to the pool house and related mechanical, electrical, and plumbing systems and site upgrades including renovations to the pool, pool deck, pool equipment building, and storage building. Bid alternates include: a shade structure, picnic tables, a slide in shallow end of the pool, and new roll up doors.

C. The Contractor, prior to submission of his bid, shall visit the site and become familiar with the physical site conditions, the plans and specifications. All existing site conditions, apparent in a detailed, on-site inspection, shall be a part of the project. Submission of a bid shall represent the Contractor’s acknowledgment of the existing site conditions and its effect on the implementation of the contract documents.

1.03 Engineering
A. Field Engineering, as a part of this contract, shall include:

1. Layout of the work and establishment of lines and grades.

2. Said work to be performed by a California Registered Civil Engineer or a California licensed Land Surveyor.

3. When discrepancies between the drawings and actual site conditions are discovered, notify the Inspector for instruction on how to proceed.

4. All work shall:
a) Establish indicated layout in relation to the property survey and existing reference points.
b) Establish and preserve permanent reference points during the course of construction.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

c) Set locations and elevations of all site elements as required for proper completion of the work.

1.04 Permits, Fees and Notices
A. The Contractor and/or his assigned Subcontractors shall obtain any and all required permits (beyond those provided in the Appendix) from all governing authorities, including other City Departments, prior to start of construction.

1.05 Construction Plans
A. Any discrepancies or omissions found in the Contract Documents shall be reported to the City’s project manager immediately. The City’s project manager will clarify discrepancies or omissions, in writing, within a reasonable time.

B. In resolving inconsistencies among two or more sections of the Contract Documents, precedence shall be given in the following order:

1. Notice to Contractors

2. Special Provisions

3. City of Roseville Parks Construction Standards

4. City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards

5. Drawings
Addenda shall take precedence over all sections referenced therein. Figure dimensions on Drawings shall take precedence over scale dimensions.

Detailed Drawings shall take precedence over general Drawings.

1.06 Definitions
A. The term “accepted” where used within, shall mean accepted in writing by the City of Roseville’s Project Manager.

B. The term “Inspector”, where noted, shall mean the project representative, appointed by the City of Roseville, who will oversee the project on a day-today basis.

C. The term “Project Manager”, where noted, shall mean the project representative appointed by the Parks Department.

D. The term “Consultant”, where noted, shall mean the prime Consultant listed on the cover sheet of these Specifications.

E. The term “accepted equal”, where used herein, shall mean the equal in the opinion of the Project Manager, in consultation with the Consultant, when necessary, and as accepted in writing by the Project Manager.

F. The term “Project Owner”, where used herein, shall mean the landowner or developer.

G. The term “provide”, where used herein, shall mean furnish and install complete.

H. The term “as selected”, where used herein, shall mean as selected by the Consultant and as accepted by the Project Manager.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

I. The term “substantially complete”, where used herein, shall mean the state of which the project can be used in the manner of which it is intended with the exception of minor items as determined by the Project Manager.

J. See Section 1 of the General Conditions for additional definitions and terms.

1.07 Standards
A. Numerous standards are referenced in these contract documents. The referenced standards shall be the current edition as of the date of these contract documents. Also, see Section 4 - 1.02 of the General Conditions.

B. The codes adopted by the City, County, State and federal agencies shall govern minimum requirements for this project. Where codes conflict with these Specifications, the more stringent shall apply, and such conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Project Manager. Caltrans Standards shall be applied where specifically referenced. In the absence of specific reference requirements in the contract documents, the applicable codes shall govern.

C. In addition to the standards noted in individual sections of these Specifications, standards of the following organizations shall be noted by initials only.

1. ANSI: American National Standards Institute.

2. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials.

1.08 Submittals
A. All submittals shall be submitted at one time within ten (10) working days from issuance of Notice to Proceed. The review time for submittals shall be as noted in Section 2 - 1.04 of the Special Conditions. Items returned for re- submittal shall be returned to the City within two weeks
B. The Contractor shall include a cover sheet indicating the following (A sample is provided in Section 5: Forms):

1. Drawing sheet or specification section reference (by section, paragraph and sub-paragraph numbers);

2. Item description;

3. Indication whether this item is “as specified” or “proposed substitution” and

4. A space for itemized response summary, e.g. “reviewed” or “resubmit”.

C. Contractor shall provide submittals electronically in PDF file format and physical product samples as required in specifications. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the summary sheet is included in the submittal package. Incomplete submittal packages (i.e., the lack of a summary sheet or lack an appropriate product sample) will not be reviewed.

D. Proposed substitution requests must include a comparison between the originally specified item and the proposed substitute. The burden of proof of compliance for proposed substitutions with project requirements rests with the Contractor. Coordination of the installation of accepted substitutions, including Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

incidental changes/modifications to accommodate proposed products shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Where required in specified Section of these Specifications, submittals shall include proof of order of site furnishings, play equipment or other materials within two weeks (ten working days) of receipt of the returned, approved submittal. Submittals of orders shall be made at one time. Exceptions will be considered, with justification.

1.09 Tests
A. In addition to Section 4 - 1.03 of the General Conditions, testing and inspections may be performed by a private testing laboratory. The testing laboratory, provided by the City, shall be under the direction of a California registered civil engineer. All work shall conform to requirements set forth by ASTM B329, and shall be acceptable to the City.

B. Copies of the laboratory reports/results of each test or inspection shall be provided to the Project Manager, Inspector and Contractor.

1.10 Temporary Facilities
A. Sanitary provisions shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Existing restroom facilities shall be not utilized by the Contractor, his Sub-contractors, or employees thereof, unless specifically accepted by the Project Manager.

Provide chemical toilets or water closets and urinals connected to the sewer in a location accepted by the Project Manager.

B. Barricades shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be erected as necessary to protect the property, the construction and the public from hazards due to construction.

C. Signs, other than those identified in these Specifications, shall be prohibited.

Notices, required by law, shall be posted and maintained.

1.11 Utilities
A. All utility fees, including, but not limited to, connection fees, installation fees, meters, monthly service fees and cost of utilities used during the course of construction and establishment are considered a direct cost and are the responsibility of the Contractor until project acceptance by City Council.

1.12 Dust/Noise Control Requirements
A. Dust and other air pollution nuisances on or adjacent to the site shall be abated, per Section 2 - 1.15 of the General Conditions. Dirt shall not be allowed to accumulate on streets or sidewalks nor be washed into sewer.

B. Noise from construction operations shall be kept to a minimum. Allowable hours of operations shall be from 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. Monday through Friday. Work on Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

weekends and holidays must be approved by the project manager. Work on weekends and holidays shall not begin before 8 a.m. and must be completed by 8 p.m.

1.13 Tree Replacement Schedule
A. Trees damaged or removed without prior approval shall be replaced at an inch per inch basis on-site, except otherwise accepted. New stock shall follow the table provided:

Plant Size Inch Value
3 Five Gallon Stock One Inch
1 Fifteen Gallon Stock One Inch
1 24” Box Stock Two Inches
1 36” Box Stock Three Inches

1.14 Inspection of Construction
A. In addition to the routine inspections performed by the Parks Inspector, portions of work may be inspected by the other city departments. Notify the Parks Inspector and Project Manager a minimum of 48 hours prior to date of inspection.

B. The Parks Inspector shall be the main line of communication between the site superintendent, the project manager and other City department inspectors.

Changes in scope of work or standards shall be approved by the project manager.

C. Refer to the parks inspection record. This shall be issued at the PreConstruction meeting and shall be utilized by the Contractor throughout the course of construction. A completed “hard card” shall be submitted to the Project Manager along with required turn in items (See 1.19 this Section) upon final acceptance of the project. The Notice of Completion shall not be filed until all record documents have been received and accepted.

1.15 Adverse Impacts to Site Conditions Due to Construction A. Impacts that affect the site conditions to the detriment of the park or streetscape Impacts that affect the site conditions to the detriment of the park or streetscape construction or long term viability of the site shall be mitigated by the contractor prior to acceptance of the project. Such impacts shall include, but are not limited to:

1. Soil compaction in non-structural areas;

2. Diesel or gas fuel leaks/spillage;

3. Buried concrete or other construction debris;

4. Hazardous material contamination;

5. Lime treatment in planting areas;

6. and more.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

1.16 Pre-final (Punch List) Review
A. Notify, in writing, to the Parks Construction Inspector, that the work is substantially complete. Substantially complete is defined as “the state of work where it may be used in a suitable and intended manner with exception of minor corrections”. Partial acceptances will not be granted. Items to be reviewed as a part of substantial completion include:

1. All construction items

2. Installation of all site furnishings, including lights and signs

3. Seeding or sodding of all turf areas

4. All planting, including weeding of planted areas

5. The irrigation system is fully functioning as designed and as confirmed by the landscape irrigation audit.

B. Within five workings days of receipt of notification, the Parks Construction Inspector will confirm substantial completion. The Parks Construction Inspector will schedule the punch list walk (pre-final review) within five working days after the project has been determined as substantially complete. A formal punch list will be developed at the punch list walk. The Parks Construction Inspector will provide a copy of the formal punch list to the Contractor within five working days of punch list walk. Performance of the punch list walk does not automatically trigger the start of establishment.

1. If at any point during this review that it becomes apparent that the Contractor has not properly prepared for the site review, the inspection shall immediately be terminated and re-scheduled at such a time as the site has been readied for a review. Any costs for the re-scheduling of the review shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Lack of site preparation could delay start of the establishment period.

C. Concurrent to the pre-final review, the City will make a formal request for all required turn-in items to be submitted to the City. All turn-in items shall be submitted to the City (single point of contact), at one time and only by appointment. Do not drop off the turn-in items at the front counter and without an appointment.

D. Once all turn-in items have been confirmed to be complete and accurate, the establishment period may be considered to begin. The City shall have sole discretion in determining the appropriateness of the commencement of the establishment period and shall notify the developer/contractor in writing of the start and end dates. Portions of the project will not be accepted for establishment prior to the substantial completion of the entire project.

1.17 Establishment Period – not applicable
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

1.18 Final Review
A. A final on-site review shall be conducted to review project readiness for final turn-over. All punch list items must be satisfactorily addressed prior to the final review.

B. The project shall be prepared and cleaned per Section 2 - 1.12 of the General Conditions; the turf shall be mowed; and the irrigation heads shall be adjusted appropriately one day prior to the scheduled final review.

C. Acceptance of the project shall be considered “field accepted” and a recommendation will be forwarded to the City Council for “final acceptance” per Section 7 - 1.01 of the General Conditions.

D. An unaccepted project shall extend the establishment period until such time as the unaccepted portions of the project have been reviewed and field accepted by the Inspector and Project Manager.

E. Turn over for City maintenance shall occur only after:

1. The specified duration of the establishment period has been successfully completed.

2. If required, the deed transferring property ownership, has been recorded at the County.

3. A Notice of Completion (NOC) for city-built parks and for streetscapes has been approved by the City Council.

F. Contractor shall provide a written guarantee covering all improvements associated with this project. See 1.19 – Warranties and Guarantees.

1.19 Record Documents
A. Record documents or as-built plans shall be maintained on-site and updated routinely as specified in Section 2 - 1.13 of the General Conditions. Record documents shall include all items under the contracted scope of work.

B. Record documents shall be submitted in electronic format:

1. one full size set of final as-built drawings (verified/initialed by the Parks Inspector during the establishment period); and

2. two sets 11 x 17 laminated reductions of the irrigation plan illustrating with colors the individual controller stations; and

3. one USB storage device containing PDF scanned images (in color) of the verified/initialed as-built drawings.

4. For City of Roseville CIP projects, SWPPP binder.

1.20 Warranties and Guarantees
A. Warranties are required under various Sections of these Specifications. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall assemble all warranties into a single, bound or stapled package. All warranties shall be clearly labeled and the Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

number of years highlighted. Also, see Sections 7 - 1.10 and 7 - 1.11 of the General Conditions.

1. Warranties for equipment shall be submitted in the manufacturer’s standard form and shall be countersigned by the subcontractor or supplier and the Contractor.

2. All other warranties shall be provided in the following format, written on subcontractor’s or supplier’s letterhead, signed by the subcontractor or supplier and countersigned by the Contractor:

WARRANTY FOR YEARS
“We hereby warrant that the product which we have installed at project name has been done in accordance with the contract documents, and that the work, as installed will fulfill the warranty requirements included in the Specifications.

We agree to repair or replace any or all of our work, together with any other adjacent work which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or material within the warranty period stated above commencing from the date of final acceptance of the above named project by the City of Roseville’s City Council, without additional expense to the City, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted.

In the event of failure to comply with the above conditions within thirty (30) days of notification by the City, we collectively or separately do hereby authorize the City to proceed with the repairs or replacement of such defects at our expense. Payment of said costs and charges will be forwarded to the City upon demand.

Signed:

Subcontractor or Supplier Date
Countersigned:

Contractor Date
B. Guarantees shall be a minimum of one (1) year for all plant material, including trees and shrubs. The guarantee shall state that plant materials (trees & shrubs) to be free of all defects or disease and all plants are in a healthy and thriving condition at the completion of the contract. Deciduous plant material shall be warranted beyond the time of contract completion until such time as growth becomes evident.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 10 00: Summary of Work

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Intentionally left blank.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
Intentionally left blank.

END OF SECTION
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 57 23: Storm Water Pollution Control

SECTION 01 57 23

STORM WATER POLLUTION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 General
A. The requirements set forth in the General Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

B. The requirements set forth in the Special Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

1.02 References
A. State Water Resources Control Board Order No. 2009-0009-DWQ National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System General Permit No. CAS0000002, for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction and Land Disturbance Activities.

B. CASQA California Stormwater BMP Handbook – Construction, November 2009

1.03 Definitions
A. NOI: Notice of Intent
B. NOT: Notice of Termination
C. QSP: Qualified SWPPP Practitioner
D. QSD: Qualified SWPPP Developer
E. SWPPP: Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan
F. SWRCB: State Water Resources Control Board
G. NPDES: National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System General H. WDID: Waste Discharger Identification number
I. BMP: Best Management Practices
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Intentionally left blank.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SWPPP
A. Comply with State Water Resources Control Board Order No. 2009-0009- DWQ National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System General Permit No.

CAS0000002, for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Construction and Land Disturbance Activities.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 57 23: Storm Water Pollution Control

B. A SWPPP has not been developed for this project. Contractors must comply with General Conditions 5-1.20 Water Pollution.

C. Implementation of the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan is the responsibility of the Contractor and a part of this project. Costs associated with implementation and maintenance of the BMPs per the SWPPP shall be included in the lump sum base bid.

D. Major changes to the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be reviewed by the City’s Parks Inspector prior to implementation. Cost associated with the major changes will be paid for using the unit cost listed in the Additions or Deletions Sheet of the Proposal
E. The City’s Parks Inspector will perform weekly inspections of the jobsite.

Implementation of and minor changes to the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan as directed by the City’s Parks Inspecor shall be incidental to the Work.

Contractor shall start all inspection corrective actions within 72 hours of observation, and complete as soon as possible.

F. All BMPs installed will be inspected by the City’s Parks Inspector for compliance with the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan and BMP Fact Sheets.

BMPs that are not in compliance shall be brought into compliance by the Contractor at no cost to the City.

G. Keep one copy of the SWPPP and amendments at the project site.

H. The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be readily available throughout the course of construction and until the NOC has been accepted by City. The Erosion and Sediment Control Plan shall be made available upon request by a representative of the Regional Water Quality Control Board, State Water Resources Control Board, United States Environmental Protection Agency, or City’ storm water staff.

I. When requested by the City for pre-final (punch list) review, the Contractor shall submit the project site copy of the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan to the City's Project Manager.

3.02 Schedule
A. Contractor shall develop a Water Pollution Control Schedule that describes the timing of grading or other work activities that could affect water pollution. The schedule shall be updated by the Contractor to reflect changes in the Contractor’s operations that would affect the necessary implementation of water pollution control practices. The typical sequence of work shall be adjusted by the Contractor based on weather conditions and forecasted rain events. The schedule is considered an appropriate and applicable BMP.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 01 57 23: Storm Water Pollution Control

3.03 Penalties and fines
A. Contractor is responsible for all penalties and fines assessed to or levied on the project related to the implementation of the Erosion and Sediment Control Plan.

B. In an effort to maintain compliance with the General Permit, the Contractor may be asked to make changes to the BMPs. If the Contractor is unable to perform these services in a timely manner the City reserves the right to address any areas of concern and deduct the cost from the contract.

3.04 BMP’s
A. Construction BMP’s shall be installed per the Erosion / Sediment Control Plan and in accordance with the CASQA California Stormwater BMP Handbook.

Use of alternative BMP’s will be reviewed and accepted at the discretion of the City’s Parks Inspector.

3.05 Cleaning
A. Thoroughly clean all areas where work has occurred. Remove from the site excess material, debris and rubbish.

B. Take all precautions to protect completed work. Immediately repair or replace all damaged areas due to tire ruts, erosion, compaction failure, etc. Keep all erosion control measures intact.

3.06 Winter Construction Suspension – not applicable

END OF SECTION
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 12 93 00: Site Furnishing

SECTION 12 93 00

SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 General Requirements
A. The requirements set forth in the General Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

B. The requirements set forth in the Supplemental Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

1.02 Description
A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment for the complete installation of all site furniture, including play equipment and play surfacing, as shown on the Plans and as specified herein.

1.03 References
A. All play equipment shall meet or exceed the standards set forth by the Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), meet all current ASTM standards and be consistent with State and local codes.

B. Nothing in the Plans or Specifications is to be construed to permit work not conforming to regulating codes and standards. The Contractor shall furnish without extra charge any material and labor, when required, by the compliance with these rules and regulations, even though the work was not mentioned in these particular Specifications or shown on the Plans.

C. The product manufacturer shall supply complete Specifications for the installation of all site furnishings, including play equipment and play surfacing.

1.04 Submittals
A. Submittals for specified items are required. The Contractor shall submit a materials summary sheet indicating which items will be installed as specified and which items are proposed for substitutions. The Contractor shall submit proof of order within ten (10) working days of the Notice to Proceed, indicating all specified materials have been ordered, noting “as specified” or “substitution proposed”. For the following items, also provide:

1. Submittals shall include color samples, manufacturer’s materials and parts list, and installation instructions.

2. All items with “color as selected by City” shall include color samples.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Project
Date
Section 12 93 00: Site Furnishing

B. On the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall immediately place the order to purchase all site furnishings, as specified on the Plans and as outlined herein. Proof of all orders shall be submitted to the Project Manager within ten (10) working days of the Notice to Proceed.

1.05 Record Drawings
A. The Contractor shall keep an accurate record of the as-built conditions of the miscellaneous site amenities. These records shall be updated daily and kept at the construction site. At any time, the Inspector may examine the conditions of the “as-builts” to ensure compliance of the above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 Materials
A. Picnic Tables shall be as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. The tables shall be as distributed by (contact name and phone number), and as manufactured by (contact name and phone number) or accepted equal. Tables shall be in-ground mount and made of perforated steel. Color as selected by the City.

B. Benches shall be as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. The benches shall be as distributed by (contact name and phone number), and as manufactured by (contact name and phone number) or accepted equal.

Benches shall be in-ground mount and made of perforated steel. Color as selected by the City.

C. Shade Structure shall be as shown on the Plans and as specified herein. The (site amenity) shall be as distributed by (contact name and phone number), and as manufactured by (contact name and phone number) or accepted equal.

Color as selected by the City.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Installation
A. Contractor to provide experienced workers or subcontractors to install all site furnishings, described in these Specifications.

B. All site furnishings shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Heights of tables and benches shall be as follows, unless otherwise required by ADA; California Title 24 or other code requirements:

Description Height Above Finish Grade
Table Surface Height 34” Maximum
Knee Space Height 27” Minimum Clear Space
Knee Space Depth 17” Minimum from edge of table to nearest obstruction under table top
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 12 93 00: Site Furnishing

Width of Knee Space 30” Minimum clear width beneath table Bench Surface Height 16” Minimum, 18” Maximum
D. Locate all footings prior to installation of drain lines. Adjust drain lines to accommodate footings.

E. All footings shall be Class A concrete with 3/4” maximum size aggregate, unless otherwise noted. Footings shall be in accordance with Caltrans Standard Specifications, Section 90. Install all footings below finish surface. In paved areas, install paved surface over footing for a clean finished surface as shown on the Plans.

F. Carefully install all furnishings and equipment without disturbance to adjacent finishes. Contractor shall be responsible for the damage and subsequent repairs of damaged finished product.

3.02 Cleaning
A. Thoroughly clean all areas where work has occurred. Remove from the site excess material, debris and rubbish.

B. Take all precautions to protect completed work. Immediately repair or replace all damaged areas due to tire ruts, erosion, compaction failure, etc. Keep all erosion control measures intact.

PART 4 - WARRANTY

4.01 General
A. Contractor shall warranty all site amenities included under this Section.

B. Contractor shall also provide a written warranty covering all materials, equipment and workmanship furnished by him to be free of all defects after installation is accepted, including all defective parts that may have been found.

C. Submit written warranty on company letterhead addressed to the City when providing As-built drawings.

D. Attach cut sheets of installed items to the warranty.

END OF SECTION
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 31 10 00: Clearing and Grubbing

SECTION 31 10 00

CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 General Requirements
A. The requirements set forth in the General Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

B. The requirements set forth in the Supplemental Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

1.02 Description
A. Preserve and protect existing site amenities to remain, including, but not limited to, trees, shrubs, underground utilities and other improvements as shown on the Plans. Protection of work shall include affected improvements on adjoining properties.

B. Scope of work includes: site preparation, removal of debris, staging of equipment and materials and securing the site for construction.

1.03 Related Work
A. Section 31 20 00: Earthwork
B. Section 01 57 23: Storm Water Pollution Control

1.04 Protection/Replacement
A. Prior to demolition, erect protective fencing a minimum of one foot (1’) beyond the canopy of all trees to remain. The radius of the canopy shall be measured from the longest branch furthest from the trunk. Refer to the environmental document for additional requirements for protective fencing on other existing natural features. For work within or near protected trees, a tree permit may be required.

B. If public use is to be maintained on unaffected portions of the project site, the Contractor shall be responsible for directing pedestrian and vehicular traffic safely around the construction zone. Utilization of temporary fencing, barricades, signage, etc. shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Safe detours shall be available to the general public at all times during the course of construction.

C. Protection of existing site improvements shown to remain, including, but not limited to, fencing, signs, benches, picnic tables, play structures, shade structures, drinking fountains, concrete paving, concrete wall and curbs, Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Project
Date
Section 31 10 00: Clearing and Grubbing

decomposed granite paving, asphalt concrete paving, recreational site improvements, etc. are to be protected and preserved.

D. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to and maintenance of all existing street improvements, drainage facilities and irrigation systems and to re-establish these improvements to their original condition as soon as possible after completion of the work in the area, to the complete satisfaction of the Project Manager and Inspector. Realignments or modifications to the existing facilities as shown on the plans are accepted.

E. Survey monuments and markers either shown on the Plans or encountered during the course of construction shall be protected and preserved. The Contractor shall notify the Inspector upon discovery of an unmarked monument, at which time, arrangements for the relocation or adjustment of the monument will be determined. All costs associated with the relocation or adjustment of these monuments shall be the Contractor’s responsibility.

F. Burning or burying removed material on-site is prohibited.

G. Where the removal of specific material creates an open hole, pit, trench or other depression, the Contractor shall immediately backfill and compact the areas consistent with requirements outlined in Section 31 20 00 of these Specifications.

H. All items identified in the Plans to remain or identified in the field to remain, removed in error by the Contractor, shall be repaired or replaced to match in equal or better construction, at no cost to the City. The quality of the repair or replacement shall be measured as that existing at contract award.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Intentionally left blank.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 Pre-Construction Site Review
A. Contractor shall review existing site conditions with the Inspector prior to start of construction and document any conditions which adversely affect the satisfactory execution of the work and final acceptance of the project.

B. Commencement of work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. The Contractor shall, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective work.

3.02 Clearing
A. Completely remove trees, shrubs, stumps, vines, rubbish/debris, undergrowth, deadwood, structures, and other elements identified to be removed and/or which interfere with the construction as shown on the Plans and as specified.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 31 10 00: Clearing and Grubbing

B. Obtain verification from the Project Manager for non-identified items scheduled to be removed prior to actual removal.

3.03 Grubbing
A. Remove all stumps, roots, grasses and weeds in its entirety. Apply systemic weed killer. Confirm weed kill prior to removal.

B. Once surface material is removed, the Contractor shall stockpile the top twelve inches (12”) of topsoil for use during the final grading phase of work. This soil shall be free of rocks, debris, roots and other undesirable material.

3.04 Utilities
A. Contact USA Alert (800) 642-2444 prior to commencement of any demolition or excavation work. Provide a minimum of 48 hours’ notice. Verify all utilities entering into and their locations within the project site.

B. Where utilities lie within the project site, but are not a part of the project, the Contractor shall cooperate with the agency or utility company having jurisdiction to maintain its use and the integrity of the structure.

C. Where utilities enter into the project site and taps, connections to or extensions of the utility are identified in the Plans, the Contractor shall coordinate all work with the agency or utility company having jurisdiction to minimize or eliminate disruption of use by the adjacent properties.

D. Verify that all utilities, shown to be removed on the Plans, are inactive and turned off prior to disconnection and/or re-routing, prior to demolition.

3.05 Debris Removal
A. All materials removed as a part of this contract shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be legally disposed of off-site, unless otherwise noted on the Plans.

B. Where a portion of a concrete slab, curb or wall and asphalt concrete paving or curb is to be removed, the concrete shall be cut with a concrete saw at a 90 degree angle so that the edge of the remaining concrete shall form a neat, straight line. Conform to the City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

END OF SECTION
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 33 00 00: Utilities

SECTION 33 00 00

UTILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 General Requirements
A. The requirements set forth in the General Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

B. The requirements set forth in the Supplemental Conditions shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

C. The standards set forth in the City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition, for storm drainage throughout the project and for sanitary sewer installations within the public rights-of-ways, easements, or as shown on the improvement plans shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

D. The standards set forth in the latest edition of the California Building Code (CBC) for sanitary sewer installation within the project site, outside of the public right-of-way or easement shall be in addition to the standards provided herein.

1.02 Description
A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment for the complete installation of the storm drain system and sanitary sewer pipe, and necessary appurtenances as shown on the Plans and as specified herein.

B. Submit a materials listing for review and approval prior to commencement of specified work.

1.03 Related Work
A. Section 31 10 00: Clearing and Grubbing
B. Section 31 20 00: Earthwork

1.04 Safety Requirements
A. Furnish, install and maintain required sheeting, shoring, bracing, and other methods to ensure complete and safe work environment for all workers. Upon completion of work, remove all bracing, shoring, etc. in its entirety, unless otherwise directed by the Inspector.

B. Prior to excavation or trenching, the Contractor shall contact USA Alert (800) C. 227-2600 to locate all known utilities a minimum of 48 hours prior to start of work. During the course of construction, the Contractor shall take every precaution to maintain and protect utilities noted to remain. Said utilities shall remain operational at all times, unless otherwise noted on the plans.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Project
Date
Section 33 00 00: Utilities

D. The existing utilities are shown on the Plans based on the information available at the time of contract document development. The City shall not assume responsibility for any inaccuracies or incompleteness of the Plans based on such information. The Contractor shall immediately notify, upon damage of any pipeline or facility, the Owner and/or its agents and take every action necessary to repair or replace damaged facilities to the satisfaction of the Inspector, and at no additional cost to the City.

E. Trenches, excavations and repair of pavement shall be consistent with Section 31 20 00: Earthwork.

1.05 Coordination
A. The piping system as shown on the Plans is diagrammatic. The Contractor shall make reasonable adjustments to the layout to avoid conflicts, based on actual field conditions. Said changes shall not interfere with the design intent of the system.

1.06 Tolerance
A. The allowable tolerance for the installation of pipe is 0.05 feet within grades or spot elevations indicated on the Plans.

1.07 Product Storage
A. Take every precaution to protect the materials and pipes from damage during the delivery, storage and installation of the pipe system. Store in a cool, contained area, protected from direct sunlight and per manufacturer’s recommendations. Pipe shall be supported on firm level ground at the site.

1.08 Record Drawings
A. The Contractor shall keep an accurate record of the as-built conditions of the storm drain and sanitary sewer system. These records shall be updated daily and kept at the construction site. At any time, the Inspector may examine the conditions of the “as-builts” to ensure compliance of the above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 General
A. All products shall conform to City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition, except as noted below.

2.02 Drain Pipe
A. Solid drainpipe shall be PVC SDR 35 and shall conform to ASTM D1784, or accepted equal. Gasketed connections shall conform to ASTM F477.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 33 00 00: Utilities

B. Perforated drainpipe shall be smooth walled PVC, open per Caltrans Section 68-1.02K, or accepted equal.

2.03 Drain Rock
A. Drain rock shall be Class 2 washed, ¾” diameter.

2.04 Filter Fabric
A. Filter fabric shall be Mirafi 140N, or accepted equal.

2.05 Drains
A. Drain Inlets shall be pre-cast and a minimum size of twenty-four inches (24”) square or round by Jensen Precast, or accepted equal.

1. Grate shall be heavy duty, cast iron, walk-on, and bolt down.

2. Box extensions shall be Jensen Precast, or accepted equal.

3. The base shall be six inches (6”) thick.

4. Walls shall be six inches (6”) thick.

5. A “No Dumping” Metal Storm Drain Marker shall be affixed to the concrete color of each drain inlet (See Detail DR-20)

6. Contractor may install cast-in-place drain inlets in lieu of pre-cast drain inlets.

Submit shop drawings and concrete mix design for review and approval.

B. Channel Drains for baseball/softball backstop areas shall be Polycast 600 series pre-sloped trench drains with galvanized steel slotted grates or accepted equal.

C. Sanitary sewer clean outs shall be as specified in the City of Roseville, Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

2.06 Manholes
A. Manholes shall have tongue and groove joints, be forty-eight inches (48”) minimum in diameter, meeting ASTM C-478.

B. Covers shall be cast iron.

C. All components shall conform to the City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

2.07 Tracer Wire
A. Insulated solid copper wire, minimum #12 gauge. Color shall be green.

2.08 Sanitary Sewer Pipe
A. Vitrified clay pipe (VCP) shall be as specified in Section 91 Sanitary Sewer in the City of Roseville, Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

B. PVC SDR 35 may be used for drinking fountain drain applications only, with prior approval, and shall conform to ASTM D3034.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Project
Date
Section 33 00 00: Utilities

2.09 Potable Water Warning Tape
A. On sites with both Recycled water and potable water lines. Blue plastic tape, 3 inches wide, with the words “CAUTION: POTABLE WATERLINE” imprinted in minimum 1-inch high, black letters. Imprinting shall be continuous and permanent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 General
A. All pipes shall slope uniformly from given elevations shown on the Plans.

B. All pipes shall be accurately laid true to line and grade, utilizing accepted construction methods.

C. Damaged or cracked pipe and fittings shall not be installed and shall be removed from site.

D. Install all pipe in locations shown on the Plans, except where existing conditions necessitate minor changes.

E. All pipe and fittings shall be kept clean and closed throughout the course of construction.

F. Connections to existing sanitary sewer stubs shall be “TV-ed” and air tested prior to the start of construction per the City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

3.02 Installation
A. Installation of the specified pipe lines shall conform to the City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

B. Notify the Inspector a minimum of 48 hours prior to covering of work to ensure timely inspections.

C. Cutting of AC or concrete paving shall be clean, vertical and straight, using a saw, or other tool specific to this application. Replace paving to existing or better condition prior to work.

D. Trench and backfill shall be per City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

E. Catch basins and drain inlets shall be installed with a concrete collar with “No Dumping” message and fish symbol depressed into the concrete or bolted in place, consistent with Drawing DR-20 the City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

F. Drain inlets installed in mulched planter areas shall have a 12-inch wide collar of 2- to 6-inch river cobble placed over filter fabric.

G. Channel drains shall be set per manufacturer’s instructions. Place slotted grates along the entire length of the backstop, including wing fencing, wherever Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Section 33 00 00: Utilities

concrete is placed adjacent to the backstop system. Provide a below grade piped connection at all gate openings into the infield area. Do not install grated drain sections at these entry/exit points.

H. Manholes shall be per City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition. Install grate flush with finish grade.

I. Sanitary Sewer Clean-outs shall be installed with 3M ball markers and shall be located within planted or turf areas, whenever possible. Place clean-outs at 100’ intervals throughout the project. Clean-outs shall not be located within play areas. Install per City of Roseville Design and Construction Standards, latest edition.

J. Upon completion, thoroughly flush storm drain system in the presence of the Parks Inspector.

K. Installation of additional products not listed in the City Standards.

3.03 Tracer Wire
A. Install tracer wire on top of the potable water lines B. Tracer wire shall be continuous with no splices.

3.04 Potable Water Warning Tape
A. To be used on all potable water piping installed within the same project limits as on-site recycled water piping.

B. Install plastic warning tape in pipe backfill, six inches above pipe, for the entire length of the pipe.

3.05 Cleaning
A. Keep site clean at all times. Remove from the site all debris and rubbish and legally dispose.

END OF SECTION
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Detach items from existing construction and deliver them to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For demolition firm.

B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's building manager's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.

4. Use of elevator and stairs.

5. Locations of proposed dust- and noise-control temporary partitions and means of egress.

6. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

7. Means of protection for items to remain and items in path of waste removal from building.

C. Inventory: After selective demolition is complete, submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project.

B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.

E. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

B. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.

Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3
E. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."
B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.
a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.

3.3 PREPARATION
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and promptly dispose of off-site.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4

7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.

8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

B. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.

3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. Patch and repair with similar materials.

B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. Patch and repair with similar materials.

C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

1. Patch and repair with similar materials.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management."
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

END OF SECTION 024119
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:
a. Contractor's superintendent.
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Concrete Subcontractor.
d. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semi-rigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Each mix design to be prepared by a California Registered Civil Engineer.

Submit to Testing Laboratory and Architect for review.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.

E. Qualification Data: For installer, manufacturer, testing agency.

F. Welding certificates.

G. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials.

2. Admixtures.

3. Form materials and form-release agents.

4. Steel reinforcement and accessories.

5. Waterstops.

6. Curing compounds.

7. Floor and slab treatments.

8. Adhesives.

9. Vapor retarders.

10. Semirigid joint filler.

11. Joint-filler strips.

H. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACIcertified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3
C. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to CBC – California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL
A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301.

2. ACI 302.

3. ACI 305.

4. ACI 306.

5. ACI 309.

6. ACI 318.

7. ACI 117.

8. ACI 360.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows:
a. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge sealed.

3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material.

Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch, minimum.

D. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

E. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Reinforcing bars to be welded: Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M.

D. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M.

E. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn steel wire into flat sheets.

F. Deformed-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, flat sheet.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES
A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy-Coated Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, plain-steel bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M epoxy coated.

C. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

D. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type 1 or II, grey color.

2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618 , Class F.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C-33 .

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch, nominal.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.

2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.

3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.

5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.

6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

7. Shrinkage Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type S.

F. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

G. Water: ASTM C 94 and potable.

H. Integral Waterproofing Admixtures: ASTM C494, Type S; complex catalyzed hydrous silicate, water and vapor proofing liquid admixture.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Moxie International Inc.; Moxie Shield 1800 Admixture, P.O. Box 838 Loomis, CA 95650; Contact Manufacturer’s representative: P:888-680-7303, F: 877-330-1930 Email:
[email protected], or comparable product.

2. Properties:
a. Water/Cement Ratio: Maximum 0.52.
b. Water Vapor Transmission: Less than 0.1 perms.
c. Water Seepage or Permeability: Not to exceed 7.00 x 10-9 cm/s at 50 psi.

2.6 WATERSTOPS
A. Flexible Rubber Waterstops: CE CRD-C 513, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

B. Chemically Resistant Flexible Waterstops: Thermoplastic elastomer rubber waterstops, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints; resistant to oils, solvents, and chemicals. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes.

2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7

2.8 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS
A. Slip-Resistive Emery Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive, crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

B. Slip-Resistive Aluminum Granule Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of not less than 95 percent fused aluminum-oxide granules.

C. Emery Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: factory-packaged, dry combination of portland cement, graded emery aggregate, and plasticizing admixture; with emery aggregate consisting of no less than 60 percent of total aggregate content.

D. Metallic Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: factory-packaged, dry combination of portland cement, graded metallic aggregate, rust inhibitors, and plasticizing admixture; with metallic aggregate consisting of no less than 65 percent of total aggregate content.

E. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

2.9 CURING MATERIALS
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

2.10 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or, ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8
E. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.11 REPAIR MATERIALS
A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 15 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9
D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.13 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS
A. Footings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.60.

3. Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch.

B. Interior Slabs and Foundation Walls: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45.

3. Slump Limit: 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch.

4. Provide Shrinkage Reducing Admixture in this mix.

C. Exterior Concrete Walks, Ramps, Equipment Pads/Slabs, and Exterior Non-Structural Uses:

Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days.

2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.55.

3. Slump Limit: 3 inches plus or minus 1 inch.

2.14 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.15 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces.

2. Class B, 1/4 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.

2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11

3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.5 JOINTS
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete.

2. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth of concrete thickness or as indicated on the drawings.

D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12
E. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

D. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.

3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.

4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.

5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and, to receive concrete floor toppings, to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated, exposed to view or, to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155, for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

3. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

H. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

C. Equipment Bases and Foundations:

1. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete base.

3. For supported equipment, install anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete substrate.

4. Prior to pouring concrete, place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

5. Cast anchor-bolt insert into bases. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms.

If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:
a. Water.
b. Continuous water-fog spray.
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges with 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days.

Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.
c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.11 JOINT FILLING
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches deep in formed joints.

Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17
to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.

3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement.

2. Steel reinforcement welding.

3. Headed bolts and studs.

4. Verification of use of required design mixture.

5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.

6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs.

C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M and CBC Chapter 19A shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below or 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 18
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

6. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

7. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

8. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

11. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.14 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS
A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period.

Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.

END OF SECTION 033000
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 1
SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete masonry units.

2. Mortar and grout.

3. Steel reinforcing bars.

4. Masonry-joint reinforcement.

5. Ties and anchors.

6. Embedded flashing.

7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for sheet metal flashing and for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

2. Section 071900 “Water Repellents” for water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product. Data to provide evidence required to show strict compliance with all Code requirements including CBC Section 2103A.

B. Shop Drawings: For the following:

1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 2

2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.

3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. CMUs.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following:

1. CMUs.

2. Accessories embedded in masonry.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates.

1. Submittal is for information only. Receipt of list does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing.

2. Submittals shall provide evidence required to show strict compliance with all Code requirements including CBC Section 2103.

B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:

1. Masonry units.
a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.
b. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units.

2. Integral water repellant used in CMUs.

3. Cementitious materials. Include name of manufacturer, brand name, and type.

4. Mortar admixtures.

5. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

6. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

7. Reinforcing bars.

8. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories.

D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 3

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.

E. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units, mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

F. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with requirements.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.

B. Quality assurance shall be in strict conformance with CBC Section 2105.

C. Substantiation for the specified compressive strength prior to the start of construction shall be obtained by the Unit Strength Method and CBC Section 2105.

D. Mortar and grout testing shall be provided per 2105.3.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry.

B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp.

C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.

D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.

E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil.

1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress.

1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls, and hold cover securely in place.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 4
B. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry.

1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface.

2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.

3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings.

4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.

C. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than seven days after completing cleaning.

D. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required.

B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.

1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 5

2.3 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

2.4 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent.

1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested according to ASTM E 514/E 514M as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive, with test period extended to 24 hours, shall show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 2000 psi.

2. Density Classification: Medium weight.

3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.

4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample.

5. Faces To Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of plaster, provide textured-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.

2.5 CMU LINTELS
A. Masonry Lintels: Built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs matching adjacent CMUs in color, texture, and density classification, with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for coldweather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

1. Alkali content shall not be more than 0.1 percent when tested according to ASTM C 114.

C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

D. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

E. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.

F. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329/C 1329M.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 6
G. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

H. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone.

2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve.

3. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.

4. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required mortar color.

I. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

J. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for glazed or pre-faced masonry units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.

K. Refractory Mortar Mix: Ground fireclay or nonwater-soluble, calcium aluminate, medium-duty refractory mortar that passes ASTM C 199 test; or an equivalent product acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

L. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

M. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.

N. Water: Potable.

2.7 REINFORCEMENT
A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS
A. General: Ties and anchors shall extend at least 1-1/2 inches into veneer but with at least a 5/8- inch cover on outside face.

B. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 7

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2.9 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" .

B. Application: Unless otherwise indicated, use the following:

1. Where flashing is indicated to receive counterflashing, use metal flashing.

2. Where flashing is indicated to be turned down at or beyond the wall face, use metal flashing.

3. Where flashing is partly exposed and is indicated to terminate at the wall face, use metal flashing with a drip edge.

4. Where flashing is fully concealed, use metal flashing.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."
D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.10 MASONRY CLEANERS
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

2.11 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.

2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated.

3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.

Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Specification. Provide the following type of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 8
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Use Sika Grout Aid at contractor’s option.

E. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Application: Use epoxy pointing mortar for exposed mortar joints with the following units:
a. Pre-faced CMUs.
b. Glazed brick.
c. Glazed structural clay facing tile.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.

3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.

4. Verify that substrates are free of substances that impair mortar bond.

B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated.

B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.

C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to opening.

D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 9
edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed.

F. Matching Existing Masonry: Match coursing, bonding, color, and texture of existing masonry.

G. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested according to ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.3 TOLERANCES
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces, do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet or 1/2-inch maximum.

7. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch.

3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 10

4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

5. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next.

3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.

Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by stepping back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry.

D. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

E. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

G. All CMU shall be filled solid with grout.

3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING
A. Lay CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints.

2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.

3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings.

4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted.

5. Fully bed units and fill cells with mortar at anchors and ties as needed to fully embed anchors and ties in mortar.

B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 11

3.6 LINTELS
A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick-size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.

3.7 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in CBC Section 2104A.1.3.1.1 and TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout lift to not more than 4’-0” (Low Lift Grouted Construction) per CBC Section 2104A.1.3.1.1.1.1.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level 2 in TMS 402 and TMS 602.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 12
D. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

E. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for compressive strength.

F. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated.

C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels.

2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry.

3. Protect adjacent stone and non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape.

4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20.

6. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.

7. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions.

8. Clean stone trim to comply with stone supplier's written instructions.

9. Clean limestone units to comply with recommendations in ILI's "Indiana Limestone Handbook."

3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
Unit Masonry 042000 - 13
B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension.

2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Section 310000 "Earth Moving."

3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

C. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

D. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION 042000
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS 051200 - 1
SECTION 051200 - MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Miscellaneous steel items.

1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data.

2. Include embedment Drawings.

3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Welding certificates.

B. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

C. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.

2. Shop primers.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS 051200 - 2

3. Nonshrink grout.

D. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
C. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303.

2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1.

3. AISC 360.

4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use.

3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS
A. Channels, Angles-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS 051200 - 3

1. Weight Class: Standard.

2. Finish: Black.

E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS
A. Headed and unheaded anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 or ASTM A 36/A 36M

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 heavy-hex carbon steel.

2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel.

3. Washers: ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon steel.

B. Bolts: ASTM A307 unless noted otherwise.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

2. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

2.4 GALVANIZING
A. Fabricated items shall be hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A123.

B. Field welds and areas that are field welded shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush and touch-up painted in the field following welding with silver zinc rich paint.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections to comply with all CBC requirements.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS 051200 - 4
B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.

2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.

4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify elevations of concrete bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

C. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS
A. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL ITEMS 051200 - 5

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Special Inspections: A qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details.

2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds.

3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: A qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION 051200
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections.

2. Miscellaneous framing supports.

3. Miscellaneous steel trim.

4. Metal canopy (shade structure).

5. Perforated metal.

6. Connection angles for wood beams.

7. Steel tube supports for roof screen wall.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 9 Section “Painting” for field painting.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exterior: Defined as the following:

1. Areas, locations, and surfaces that are unprotected, or exposed to environmental elements.

2. Areas, locations and surfaces within uncontrolled environments.

3. Areas, locations and surfaces of unconditioned spaces, including belowgrade/underground, partially-exposed, or “covered” parking areas.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For items specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections.

Show anchorage and accessory items.

2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of metal fabrications that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads.

2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Provide hot-dip or mechanically deposited, zinc-coated anchor bolts where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

B. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 9 painting Sections.

C. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Clean and /or SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Clean.

D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.

G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.

C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5

2.8 METAL CANOPY (SHADE STRUCTURE)
A. Custom canopy as indicated on Drawings.

2.9 PERFORATED METAL
A. Product: Designer Metals by McNichols or equal.

1. Item Number: 16331020M7.

2. Product Line: Designer Metals.

3. Hole Type: Designer Perforated.

4. Series Name: Mosaic.

5. Primary material: Carbon Steel (CS).

6. Alloy, Grade or Type: Cold Rolled (CR).

7. Material Finish: Mill Finish.

8. Gauge/Thickness: 10 gauge (.0359 inch thick).

9. Hole Pattern: Parallel trapezoids and square holes.

10. Percent Open Area: 40%.

11. Weight: 0.90 lbs/square foot.

12. Product Form: Sheet.

B. Product: Perforated Metals by McNichols or equal.

1. Item Number: 16169116M1.

2. Product Line: Perforated Metal.

3. Hole Type: Hexagonal.

4. Primary material: Carbon Steel (CS).

5. Alloy, Grade or Type: Cold Rolled (CR).

6. Material Finish: Mill Finish.

7. Gauge/Thickness: 16 gauge (.0598 inch thick).

8. Hole Pattern: 1/2 inch Hexagonal on 9/16 inch staggered centers.

9. Hole Size: 1/2 inch.

10. Hole Centers: 9/16 inch.

11. Bar Width: 1/16 inch.

12. Hole Arrangement: 60 degree staggered centers.

13. Holes per square inch (HPSI): 4.02.

14. Percent Open Area: 79%.

15. Weight: 0.50 lbs/square foot.

16. Product Form: Sheet.

C. Product: Perforated Metals by McNichols or equal.

1. Item Number: 1731384048.

2. Product Line: Perforated Metal.

3. Hole Type: Round.

4. Primary material: Aluminum (AL).

5. Alloy, Grade or Type: Alloy 5052-H32 (5052H32).

6. Material Finish: Mill Finish.

7. Gauge/Thickness: 18 gauge (.0400 inch thick).

8. Hole Pattern: 3/16 inch round on 3/8 inch staggered centers.

9. Hole Size: 3/16 inch.

10. Hole Centers: 3/8 inch.

11. Bar Width: 3/16 inch.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6

12. Hole Arrangement: 60 degree staggered centers.

13. Holes per square inch (HPSI): 8.33.

14. Percent Open Area: 23%.

15. Weight: 0.43 lbs/square foot.

16. Product Form: Sheet.

2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below:

1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications:

1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) and Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPCSP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:

Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

D. Field Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section “Painting” for field painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

3. Remove welding flux immediately.

4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.

B. Anchor supports for overhead doors securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

END OF SECTION 055000
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Framing with dimension lumber.

2. Roof sheathing.

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

4. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.

5. Wood furring and grounds.

6. Wood sleepers.

7. Utility shelving.

8. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.

Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2

2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.

3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING
A. 2x and 3x joists, rafters, and sub-purlins:

1. Species: Douglas Fir Larch.

2. Grade: No. 2.

B. 2x and 3x studs, plates, and blocking :

1. Species: Douglas Fir Larch.

2. Grade: No. 2.

C. 4x and 6x posts :

1. Species: Douglas Fir Larch.

2. Grade: No. 1.

D. 4x and 6x beams, purlins, headers and blocking :

1. Species: Douglas Fir Larch.

2. Grade: No. 1.

E. Wood, cants, furring, grounds, sleepers and other non-structural items:

1. Species: Douglas Fir Larch.

2. Grade: Construction.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking.

2. Nailers.

3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.

4. Cants.

5. Furring.

6. Grounds.

7. Utility shelving.

B. Utility Shelving: Lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following the following species and grades:

1. Eastern white pine, Idaho white, lodgepole, ponderosa, or sugar pine; Standard or No. 3 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. 1 grade; SPIB.

3. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

4. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades:

1. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

2. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.

3. Western woods; Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4

2.6 STRUCTURAL ROOF SHEATHING
A. Roof Sheathing: APA Structural 1, Grade C-D, Exposure 1, minimum 5 ply construction, complying to Product Standard PS 1-95.

2.7 FASTENERS
A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Metal framing anchors shall be manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie and shall be of type indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

C. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), highstrength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted.

Fit rough carpentry accurately to other construction..

D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.

E. Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5
F. Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.

H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c.

J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows:

1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.

2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2-inch nominal thickness.

3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.

K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.

2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

M. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

N. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated.

O. Use steel common nails. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING, AND OTHER NON-STRUCTURAL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.

3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise indicated. Construct as indicated on the drawings.

3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION
A. Ceiling Joists: Install with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.

B. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions if any.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect rough carpentry from weather.

END OF SECTION 061000
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 068200 - 1
SECTION 068200 - FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Fiber reinforced plastic panel system for adhesive mounting.

2. Moldings, adhesive, and joint sealants.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

B. Selection Samples: For each finish specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

C. Maintenance Instructions.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fiber reinforce plastic panels that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 068200 - 2
B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Crane Composites (formerly Kemlite). (Basis of Design)

2. Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) panels by Marlite

3. Glasteel.

4. Or equal.

2.2 PANEL SYSTEM
A. Plastic Panel System: Factory finished panels, trim, sealant, and accessories.

B. Panels: FXE, Fire-X Glasbord Embossed Wall Panels by Crane or equal.

1. Composition:
a. Reinforcement: Random chopped fiberglass.
b. Resin Mix: Modified polyester copolymer and inorganic fillers and pigments.

2. Class A fire rating in accordance with Factory Mutual Research approval standard 4880.

3. Finish: Surfaseal.
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

4. Test Data:
a. Meets USDA/FSIS requirements
b. FRP does not support mold or mildew (per ASTM D3273 and ASTM D3274). c. Meets minimum requirements of major model building codes for Class A interior wall and ceiling finishes of flame spread ≤ 25, smoke developed 450 or less (per ASTM E-84)
d. Crane Composites certifies that Fire-X Glasbord (FXE) meets the requirements of ASTM D5319.
e. Classification Class A - Flame spread 0 to 25, smoke development index of 450 or less per ASTM E 84.
f. Grade 6: 0.081 to 0.099 n.; 0.090 in. nominal.
g. Tolerances:
1) Width and Length: ± .125 in up to and including 12 ft. 2) Squareness: ± .125 in.
3) Thickness: ± .10%.
h. Product identified by 1 red thread and 1 blue thread on the back. i. Two Translucent Plastic Threads withFluorescent Pigment Design® on the front identify Fire-X Glasbord.
j. MEA Approved. MEA 16-85M. VOL. II
k. Factory Mutual Approved Fire-X Glasbord is the only fiberglass reinforced plastic interior wall panel that is accepted under Factory Mutual Research Approved l. FRP, Class 1 Interior Finish Material in accordance with Factory Mutual Research Approval Standard 4880. Test report #2B2A2.AM.

5. Panel Trim: Extruded PVC, in manufacturer's standard colors. a. Outside corners, inside corners, edge trim, and division molding.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS 068200 - 3

6. Sealant: Marlite Silicone Sealant; gunnable silicone rubber; clear.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimatize to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Use the adhesives recommended by the panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local regulations; obtain manufacturer's approval of alternative adhesives.

C. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8 inch expansion space.

D. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary and replace if not possible to repair to original condition.

E. Protect installed products until completion of project.

F. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 068200
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY TESTING 071909 - 1
SECTION 071909 - CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY TESTING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for independent testing and inspection requirements for concrete moisture and alkalinity.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section “Concrete Moisture and Alkalinity Barrier” for concrete sealers to reduce moisture and alkalinity level when testing fails.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Independent testing agency qualifications: Past 4 year history of testing of comparable project size and scope.

B. Product data: Moisture test kit.

C. Testing Results: Provide interior temperature, humidity, moisture vapor and alkalinity results for testing period.

1. Alkalinity and Adhesion Test Report.

2. Moisture Test Report.

D. Locations Map: Provide each testing result documented on a locations map. Map may be finish floor plan by Architect or similar representation.

E. Record Submittals: Testing reports and locations map.

1.4 SCHEDULING
A. Site Meeting: Testing Agency, Owner, Architect and Contractor shall meet 30 days prior to flooring installation to discuss testing requirements, specifications and locations prior to testing.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY TESTING 071909 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MOISTURE TESTING
A. Test Method: ASTM F2170, Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

1. ASTM F 1869, Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride is NOT acceptable method.

B. The In-Situ Method:

1. In-situ probes deepen concrete moisture measurement. For decades, builders used (and some still do) the anhydrous calcium chloride test for concrete moisture vapor emissions rate (MVER). The MVER is defined as the rate of water vapor emissions from the surface of concrete and is determined with the use of a desiccant material sealed to the slab surface for a specified time period, then measured. It has been believed that the change in the desiccant weight could be translated into a moisture ratio for the concrete beneath.

2. In-situ concrete moisture testing places sensors, or probes, inside the slab itself. As concrete dries, moisture migrates from the bottom of the slab to the surface where it can evaporate away. Logically then, moisture levels at the bottom of a slab will read higher from those at the surface. In-situ probes provide relative humidity (RH) measurements at 40% of the slab’s depth*, a position proven to more accurately portray the final RH levels of the slab if it were to be sealed at that point in time and the slab moisture allowed to fully equilibrate.

C. Acceptable Testing Devices for ASTM F2170 Test:

1. Wagner Meters Rapid RH® system by Wagner.

2. Protimeter by T Equipment.

3. Relative Humidity Meter system by American Moisture Test.

4. Or equal.

2.2 ALKALINITY TESTING
A. Alkalinity Test, ASTM F 710, Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring

1. Digital wide range 1–14 pH meter.

2. Waterproof flat tip.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Site: Weatherproofed, doors installed and windows secured. Do not start testing process when site has standing water, surface contaminates, exposed to exterior conditions or concrete installation is less than 90 days of age.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY TESTING 071909 - 3

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean concrete substrates of adhesives residue, paint, curing, sealing, floor coverings a minimum of 24 hours prior to installation of testing equipment.

B. Temperature & Humidity: Maintain site at the temperature and humidity conditions to those anticipated during normal occupancy and maintain these conditions minimum of 7 days (exceed ASTM F1869 requirements) prior and during testing period.

C. When a building is not under HVAC control, a recording hygrometer or data logger shall be in place recording conditions during the test period. A transcript of this information must be included with testing results.

3.3 MOISTURE TESTING
A. In-Situ Probe Test: Perform relative-humidity test using in-situ probes per ASTM F2170.

B. Floor shall have reading of 95% or less per ASTM F2170; unless finish flooring product require better value.

3.4 ALKALINITY TESTING
A. Test: Perform pH testing per ASTM F710.

B. pH range between 8 and 10; unless finish flooring product require better value.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Engage and pay for qualified independent testing agency specified to perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Testing agency shall perform tests for characteristics specified, using applicable referenced testing procedures.

2. Testing agency shall verify thickness of coatings during traffic coating application.

3. If test results show coating materials do not comply with requirements, remove noncomplying materials, prepare surfaces, and reapply coatings.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 071909
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY BARRIER 071920 - 1
SECTION 071920 - CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY BARRIER PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplemental, and Special Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Concrete moisture and alkalinity barrier when moisture or alkalinity test fails.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section “Concrete Moisture and Alkalinity Testing” for independent moisture and alkalinity testing prior to installation of flooring materials.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content.

B. Samples: For each type of barrier and substrate indicated, 12 by 12 inches in size, with specified water-repellent treatment applied to half of each Sample.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that barrier comply with requirements.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Test Reports: Independent third party testing results:

1. ASTM E 96 Water Vapor Transmission: up to 95% Vapor Reduction

2. ASTM D 4541 Concrete Adhesion: 500psi or concrete cohesive failure

3. ASTM D 1308 Chemical Resistance: 100% resistant to acid and alkali F. Field Quality Control Documents: Post installation testing by independent testing agency per ASTM F1869, ASTM D 4541.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Warranty Period: Barrier warranty for 15 years covering performance, concrete adhesion, moisture or alkalinity damage to barrier and installed floor coverings. In the event of barrier failure, manufacturer shall cover labor and material cost to replace moisture or alkalinity Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY BARRIER 071920 - 2
damaged flooring or coatings, reapply barrier, adhesives, patching compounds and installation accessories.

1. Moisture Vapor Reduction: No upper performance limitations.

2. Alkalinity Control: No upper performance limitations.

3. Manufacturing defects warranties are not acceptable.

B. Warranty shall not exclude ACI documents, dew point, concrete salts, admixtures, resin and silicate surfaces treatments. Installations on slab surfaces deems acceptance of on site conditions.

Barrier manufacturer is responsible for complete review of concrete mix designs, admixtures, sub slab vapor barrier installed and curing methods for written acceptance prior to installations.

C. Installer: Submit 15 year warranty covering installation defects and improper installations on workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Concrete Moisture and Alkalinity Barrier: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. VAP-1 2000 FS by Koster. (Basis of Design)

2. Vapor-Guard DC by Advance Moisture Control.

3. MES 100 by Floor Seal Technology Inc.

4. Or equal.

2.2 CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY BARRIER
A. Product: VAP I 2000 FS by Koster or equal.

1. Fast-setting, one-coat, membrane-forming, moisture vapor control system consisting of a unique combination of epoxy resins and other compounds formulated to prevent floor covering failures on concrete slabs with elevated levels of moisture.

2. Meets or exceeds the performance requirements in ASTM F3010-13 Standard Practice for Two-Component Resin Based Membrane-Forming Moisture Mitigation Systems for Use Under Resilient Floor Coverings.

3. Has no upper limit for water vapor emission from concrete floor slabs. It can be applied to concrete slabs with relative humidity up to 100% RH and it provides protection from sustained exposure to pH 14.

4. Low permeance of 0.047 perms, moisture blocker for virtually all types of flooring, including low permeance flooring such as sheet goods and rubber tile.

5. Compliant with all state and federal VOC regulations, having VOC content of 0 g/L, which allows installation in sensitive areas such as hospitals, schools, and grocery stores.

B. Concrete Topcoat: Cement based self-leveling underlayment product acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
CONCRETE MOISTURE AND ALKALINITY BARRIER 071920 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to barrier manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure that surface is dry enough.

1. Shot blast surface to allow maximum penetration and adhesion. Grind near walls and edges.

B. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow-over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass.

C. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply barrier until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.

1. Barrier work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLICATION
A. Barrier: Apply by squeegee and roller application methods to saturate entire surface. Spread rates shall produce results of up to 95% moisture reduction per ASTM E 96 and post installation testing rate specified.

B. Roller and squeegee methods to saturate concrete porosity. Final surfaces shall be light reflective white.

C. Joint and Crack Treatment: Apply barrier directly over cracks, holes, and slab imperfections for maximum flexibility, moisture vapor and alkalinity control.

D. Cement Topcoat: As required for applications under resilient flooring for sealants installed after curing of concrete.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests:

1. Conduct moisture-alkalinity test by an independent testing company prior to resilient flooring and carpet installation.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately clean barrier from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by barrier application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by barrier application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions.

END OF SECTION 071920
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 1
SECTION 072100 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Concealed thermal and sound insulation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer if p.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.

3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 2

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of building insulation that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Glass-Fiber Batt/Blanket Thermal and Sound Insulation: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Owens Corning. (Basis of Design)

2. Johns Manville (JM).

3. CertainTeed Corporation.

4. Or equal.

B. Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket (Fire-Safing) Insulation: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Thermafiber Safing Insulation by Thermafiber.

2. Fibrex Insulations Inc.

3. Owens Corning.

4. Or equal.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BATT/BLANKET INSULATION
A. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Batt/Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Glass-fiber bonded with acrylic thermosetting binder.

1. For walls and partitions: Unfaced Batts.

B. Thermal Rating: R values as indicated on Drawings.

C. Sound Attenuation Ratings: Minimum R-11 on interior walls and partitions, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 3

2.3 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET (FIRE-SAFING) INSULATION A. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inches wide.

B. Nails or Staples: Steel wire; electroplated, or galvanized; type and size to suit application.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 4

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Install insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.

4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves.

5. For wood-framed construction, install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION 072100
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 1 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

SECTION 075419 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Mechanically-fastened thermoplastic PVC/TPA roofing system on wood deck, including:

2. Roof insulation cover board.

3. Walkway material.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
a. Indicate details meet requirements of NRCA and FMG required by this Section.

2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.

3. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.

2. Roof insulation.

3. Walkway pads or rolls.

4. Metal termination bars.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 2 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

5. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.

6. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Product Certificate: Submit notarized certificate, indicating products intended for Work of this Section, including product names and numbers and manufacturers' names, with statement indicating that products to be provided meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer, Manufacturer, and Roofing Inspector.

1. Include letter from Manufacturer written for this Project indicating approval of Installer.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements, including FM Global listing.

2. Product Compatibility: Indicate manufacturer has verified compatibility of roofing system components, including but not limited to: Roofing membrane, flashing sheets, adhesives, and sealants.

D. Warranties: Unexecuted sample copies of special warranties.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years' experience installing products comparable to those specified, able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees, and qualified by the manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and furnish warranty of type specified.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section, UL listed for roofing systems identical to that specified for this Project, with minimum five years experience in manufacture of specified products in successful use in similar applications.

C. Roofing Inspector Qualifications: A technical representative of manufacturer not engaged in the sale of products and experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system, qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article, to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this Project, and approved by the manufacturer to issue warranty certification. The Roofing Inspector shall be one of the following:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 3 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

1. An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer.

D. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner, Architect, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Examine substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 4 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

B. Daily Protection: Coordinate installation of roofing so insulation and other components of roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing and insulation with a course of roofing sheet securely in place with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing.

3. Remove temporary plugs from roof drains at end of each day.

4. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty, General: Warranties specified shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.

1. Manufacturer's warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, fasteners, roofing membrane accessories and other components of roofing system specified in this Section.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Installer's Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on Installer’s letterhead, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section and related Sections indicated above, including all components of membrane roofing such as single ply roofing membrane, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Extended Roof System Warranty: Warranties specified in this Section include the following components and systems specified in other sections supplied by the roofing system Manufacturer, and installed by the roofing system Installer:

1. Sheet metal flashing and trim, including roof penetration flashings.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 5 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

2. Manufactured copings, roof edge, counterflashings, and reglets.

3. Roof curbs, hatches, and penetration flashings.

4. Roof and parapet expansion joint assemblies.

5. Metal roof, wall, and soffit panels and trim.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by a manufacturer meeting qualification requirements in Quality Assurance Article.

B. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer/Product: The roof system specified in this Section is based upon products of Tremco, Inc. or Architect / Owner Approved Equal.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency.

Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

D. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

E. Energy Star Listing: Roofing system shall be listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.

F. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance index of not less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 6 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

2.3 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Thermoplastic PVC/TPA sheet, ASTM D4434 Type IV internally fabric reinforced, Energy Star qualified, CRRC listed, and California Title 24 Energy Code compliant.

1. Basis of design product: Tremco, TPA Roof Membrane.

2. Tensile Strength at 0 deg. F (-18 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 751: 300 lbf/in.

3. Tear Strength at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 751: 100 lbf.

4. Elongation at 0 deg. F (-18 deg. C), minimum at fabric break, ASTM D 751: 25 percent.

5. Minimum Thickness, nominal, ASTM D 751: 60 mils.

6. Exposed Face Color: White.

7. Reflectance, ASTM C 1549: 86 percent.

8. Thermal Emittance, ASTM C 1371: 0.86.

9. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI), ASTM E 1980: 108.

10. Recycled Content, minimum: 25 percent preconsumer.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC/TPA sheet membrane.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Membrane Bonding Adhesive:

1. Elastomeric solvent-based contact-type adhesive for bonding TPA single ply membranes and flashings to substrates..
a. Basis of design product: Tremco, TPA Single Ply Bonding Adhesive or Equal. b. Density at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 1475: 7.0 lb/gal. c. Percent solids, minimum: 25 percent.

C. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 mm by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 7 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

D. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm) thick, prepunched.

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

F. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 ROOF INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Glass-mat-faced gypsum panel, ASTM C1177/C 1177M.

1. Basis of design product: Tremco/GP Gypsum DensDeck.

2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

B. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured [or approved] by roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Global-approved roof insulation.

C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.6 WALKWAY MATERIALS
A. Walkway roll, reinforced PVC/TPA membrane roll with serrated slip-resistant surface, fabricated for heat welding to compatible PVC/TPA membrane surface.

1. Basis of design product: Tremco, TPA Walkway Roll or Equal.

2. Roll Size: 36 inches by 60 feet.

3. Thickness: 0.080 inch.

4. Color: Grey.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 8 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

2. Wood Roof Deck: Verify that wood deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

B. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

C. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

D. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

E. Cover Boards: Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and mechanically fasten to roof deck.

1. Mechanically fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. Install 8 fasteners per 4’ X 8’ board.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 9 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

3.5 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082.

B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Mechanically fasten or adhere membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

F. Welded Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

G. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.6 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Pool House, Storage & Mechanical Roofs
Johnson Pool Phase 2
075419 - Page 10 of 10

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING

3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway roll to match layout of existing walkway. Heat weld to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer Inspector: Manufacturer will employ technical personnel to inspect the roof while it is being installed. Roof will be inspected a minimum of 3 times per week while in progress.

B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 075419
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Sheet metal flashing and trim not specifically specified in other sections.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 9 Section “Painting” for field painting of sheet metal flashing and trim.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:

1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.

2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.

3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.

4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.

5. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction.

6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable.

7. Details of special conditions.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2

8. Details of connections to adjoining work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sheet metal flashing and trim that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Galvanized Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim:

1. Fry Reglet Corporation.

2. Hickman, W. P. Company.

3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.

4. Or equal.

2.2 SHEET METALS
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153 or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

F. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansionjoint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.

1. Gutter Style: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Downspouts: Schedule 40 pipe.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.

2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.

3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

I. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.

J. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5

2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated.

6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6

2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder aluminum sheet.

2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint.

Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.

G. Flashing corners shall be shop fabricated and fully soldered such that corner assemblies are single monolithic units for 18" in all directions from corners.

3.3 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than 36 inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter.

2. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to roof deck.

3.4 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Overhead-Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans independent from structure above as indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system.

B. Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation of roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

3.5 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing." Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 076200
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FLEXIBLE SHEET FLASHING 076500 - 1
SECTION 076500 - FLEXIBLE SHEET FLASHING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Flexible sheet flashing for windows, doors, parapets, and other openings and where indicated on Drawings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Concurrent Review Requirements: Submit submittals of this section with doors and windows sections.

B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of flexible sheet flashing.

C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of flexible sheet flashing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

D. Samples: For the following products:

1. 12-by-12-inch square of flexible sheet flashing.

E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for flexible sheet flashing.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to flexible sheet flashing manufacturer for installation of flexible sheet flashing required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain flexible sheet flashing materials through one source from a single manufacturer.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FLEXIBLE SHEET FLASHING 076500 - 2
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup with doors and windows.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to flexible sheet flashing including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review and discuss the flashing to be coordinated with the finishing of doors and windows.

3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of flexible flashing with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for sealants and fasteners.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by flexible sheet flashing manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of flexible sheet flashing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Flexible Sheet Flashing: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. WR Grace (Basis of Design).

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FLEXIBLE SHEET FLASHING 076500 - 3

2. FortiFlash by Fortifiber.

3. FlexWrap and StraightFlash by DuPont.

4. Or equal.

2.2 FLEXIBLE SHEET FLASHING
A. Product: Vycor Plus by WR Grace or equal.

1. Self-Adhered, cross-laminated high-density polyethylene (HDPE) sheet, backed by aggressive pressure-sensitive rubberized asphalt adhesive.

2. Thickness: 25 mil minimum per ASTM D3767, Method A.

3. Low temperature flexibility: Unaffected at minus 45 degrees F. per ASTM D1970.

4. Elongation, ultimate failure of rubberized asphalt: 200 percent minimum per ASTM D412.

5. Cracked cycling 100 cycles: Unaffected at minus 25 degrees F. per ASTM C836.

6. Lap adhesion at minimum application temperature: 60 plf width per ASTM D1876 modified.

7. Adhesion to concrete at minimum application temperature: 60 plf width per ASTM D903.

8. ICBO: ER-6141.

9. Recommended exposure limit: 30 days.

10. Perm-A-Barrier by Grace is not acceptable.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. Mastic, Joint Sealant, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by flexible sheet flashing manufacturer.

1. Caulking, sealants, and adhesives applied on the interior of the building envelope shall comply with Sacramento Metro AQMD.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by flexible sheet flashing manufacturer.

2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install flexible sheet flashing in accordance with the manufacturer’s written instructions, AAMA Publication 2400, and the applicable code.

END OF SECTION 076500
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1
SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Roof curbs.

2. Equipment supports.

3. Roof hatches.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 9 Section “Painting” for field finishes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roofmounted items. Show the following:

1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section.

2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure.

3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit.

D. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 2

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

1. With Architect's approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt roof drainage routes.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roof accessories that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Roof Hatches and Heat and Smoke Vents: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Bilco Company (The). (Basis of Design)

2. Babcock-Davis.

3. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company.

4. Nystrom, Inc.

5. O'Keeffe's Inc.

6. ThyCurb; Div of Thybar Corporation.

7. Or equal.

B. Roof Curbs: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 3

1. Custom Curb, Inc.

2. LM Curbs.

3. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation.

4. Or equal.

C. Equipment Supports: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Custom Curb, Inc.

2. LM Curbs.

3. ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation.

4. Or equal.

2.2 METAL MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coated and mill phosphatized for field painting.

1. Comply with Division 9 Section “Painting” for field finishes.

B. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, baked-enamel finished.

D. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123.

E. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 1 inch thick.

B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

C. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

D. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

1. Caulking and sealants applied on the interior of the building envelope shall comply with Sacramento Metro AQMD.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 4
F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

1. Caulking and sealants applied on the interior of the building envelope shall comply with Sacramento Metro AQMD
G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.

1. Caulking and sealants applied on the interior of the building envelope shall comply with Sacramento Metro AQMD.

2.4 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral metal cant and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.
a. Finish: Factory prime painted and field painted per Division 9 Section “Painting”.

2. Factory insulate curbs with 1-1/2-inch- thick, cellulosic or glass-fiber board insulation.

3. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.

2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A. Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, internally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints, with integral metal cant and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.

1. Load Requirements: See mechanical equipment schedule.

2. Insert load requirements.

3. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.

4. Factory-install continuous wood nailers 5-1/2 inches wide at tops of equipment supports.

5. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard removable counterflashing, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support.

6. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.

7. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

8. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 5

2.6 ROOF HATCHES
A. General: Fabricate roof hatches with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing.

Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints. Provide continuous weathertight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware.

B. Product: Type S or E depending on size by Bilco or equal.

1. Type: Galvanized 14 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel single (S) or double-leaf (E) lid as indicated on Drawings.

2. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Cover:
a. 3 inch beaded flange with formed reinforcing members. Cover shall have a heavy extruded EPDM rubber gasket that is bonded to the cover interior to assure a continuous seal when compressed to the top surface of the curb. b. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire arc of opening and closing.
c. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. d. Entire hatch shall be weather tight with fully welded corner joints on cover and curb.

4. Cover insulation: Shall be fiberglass of 1 inch thickness, fully covered and protected by a metal liner 22 gauge paint bond G-90 galvanized steel.

5. Curb: 12 inch in height with integral capflashing, 1 inch fiberboard insulation, fully welded at corners, and 3-1/2 inch mounting flange with 7/16 inch holes provided for securing frame to the roof deck.

6. Curb insulation: Shall be rigid, high-density fiberboard of 1 inch thickness on outside of curb.

7. Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position.

8. Safety Railing System: Manufacturer's standard complete system including rails, clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and all accessories required for a complete installation. Bil-Guard Hatch Rail System or equal.

9. Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section ”Painting”.

2.7 FINISH
A. Galvanized Steel: Field finish per Division 9 Section “Painting”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories.

2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 6

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation.

Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement.

B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance.

C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Coat concealed side of roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing exposed-to-view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment.

3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance.

D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.

E. Roof Curb Installation:

1. Set roof curb so top surface of roof curb is level.

F. Equipment Support Installation:

1. Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level.

G. Roof Hatch Installation:

1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware.

2. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb.

3. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 TOUCH UP
A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance with Division 9 painting Sections.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 7
END OF SECTION 077200
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems."

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire walls, fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers.

2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479:

1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through-penetration firestop systems with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas:
a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities.
b. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance-rated shaft enclosures.

3. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0 cfm/sq. ft at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction.

1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moistureresistant through-penetration firestop systems.

2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means.

3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item.

Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

2. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.

C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information:

1. Types of penetrating items.

2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.

3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through-penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing through-penetration firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3
in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fireresistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements:
a. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following:
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through-penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.

C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through-penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of through-penetration firestop system that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Hilti, Inc.

2. Specified Technologies Inc.

3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

4. Or equal.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating throughpenetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5
qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items:

1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.

2. Temporary forming materials.

3. Substrate primers.

4. Collars.

5. Steel sleeves.

C. Caulking, sealants, and adhesives applied on the interior of the building envelope shall comply with Sacramento Metro AQMD.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems containing the types of fill materials indicated in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3 by referencing the types of materials described in this Article. Fill materials are those referred to in directories of referenced testing and inspecting agencies as "fill," "void," or "cavity" materials.

B. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

C. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.

D. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

E. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet.

F. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

G. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

H. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

I. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6
J. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

K. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces.

3. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces.

2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through-penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 7
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.

3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

4. Date of installation.

5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name.

6. Installer's name.

B. Marking and Identification: Fire walls, fire barriers, fire partitions, smoke barriers and smoke partitions or any other wall required to have protected openings or penetrations shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs or stenciling. Such identification shall:

1. Be located in accessible concealed floor, floor-ceiling or attic spaces.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 8

2. Be repeated at intervals not exceeding 30 feet measured horizontally along the wall or partitions.

3. Include lettering not less than 0.5 inch in height, incorporating the suggest wording: “fire and/or smoke barrier – protect all openings,” or other wording.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

3.7 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM LOCATION
A. Provide assemblies as indicated on Drawings. Provide following products for additional locations not identified on Drawings.

B. For penetrations by non combustible items including steel pipe, copper pipe, rigid steel conduit and electrical metallic tubing (EMT), the following materials are acceptable:

1. Hilti FS 601 Elastomeric Firestop Sealant.

2. Hilti FS ONE High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant.

3. 3M Fire Stop Sealant 2000 4. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB.

4. Tremco Tremstop Fyre Sil Sealant.

5. Or equal.

C. For penetrations by combustible items (penetrants consumed by high heat flame) including insulated metal pipe, PVC jacketed, flexible cable or cable bundles and plastic pipe (closed piping systems) the following materials are acceptable:

1. Hilti FS ONE High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant.

2. Hilti CP 618 Firestop Putty.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 9

3. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Jacket.

4. Hilti CP 643 Firestop Jacket.

5. 3M Fire Barrier CP25 WB.

6. 3M Fire Barrier FS 195 Wrap/Strip.

7. Tremco Tremstop WBM Intumescent Firestop Sealant.

8. Or equal.

D. For penetrations by combustible plastic pipe (open piping systems), the following materials are acceptable:

1. Hilti CP 642 Firestop Jacket.

2. Hilti CP 643 Firestop Jacket.

3. Hilti FS ONE High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant.

4. 3M Fire Barrier PPO Plastic Pipe Device.

5. Or equal.

E. For large size/complex penetrations made to accommodate cable trays, multiple steel and copper pipes, electrical busways in raceways' the following materials are acceptable:

1. Hilti FS 635 Trowelable Firestop Compound.

2. Hilti FIRE BLOCK.

3. 3M Firestop Foam 2001.

4. 3M Fire Barrier CS 195 Composite Sheet.

5. Or equal.

END OF SECTION 078413
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 1
SECTION 078446 - FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fire-resistive joint systems for interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not, and other openings indicated.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items.

2. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive joint sealants.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed.

B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, and with movement capabilities and L-ratings indicated as determined by UL 2079.

1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test.

C. For fire-resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire-resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated.

1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 2
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of fire-resistive joint systems' compliance with ICBO ES AC30, from the ICBO Evaluation Service.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."
B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fireresistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article:

1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following:
a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 3
B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

C. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fire-resistive joint systems that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems for each application that are produced by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Hilti, Inc.

2. Specified Technologies Inc.

3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

4. Or equal.

2.2 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS
A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials.

2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 5

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports.

B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire-resistive joint systems shall take place in successive stages as installation of fire-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements.

1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements.

C. Remove and replace fire-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fireresistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fireresistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.6 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM LOCATION
A. For fire rated construction joints and other gaps, the following materials are acceptable:

1. FS 601 Elastomeric Firestop Sealant by Hilti.

2. CP 601 s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant by Hilti.

3. CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant by Hilti.

4. CP 672 Firestop Joint Spray by Hilti.

5. Firestop Sealant 2000 by 3M.

6. Tremstop Fyre Sil Sealant by Tremco.

7. Or equal.

B. For openings between structurally separate sections of wall and floors. Top of walls, the following materials along with Thermafiber Safing are acceptable:

1. FS 60t Elastomeric Firestop Sealant by Hilti.

2. CP 601s Elastomeric Firestop Sealant by Hilti.

3. CP 606 Flexible Firestop Sealant. by Hilti
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 6

4. FS ONE High Performance Intumescent Firestop Sealant by Hilti.

5. Fire Barrier CP 25 WB by 3M.

6. Or equal.

C. Firestopping at Electrical Boxes and Utility Outlets.

1. CP 618 Firestop Putty Stick by Hilti.

2. CP 617 and CP 617L Firestop Putty Pad by Hilti.

3. Or equal.

END OF SECTION 078446
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes joint sealants.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

D. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Mockups: Build mockups incorporating sealant joints, as follows, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution:

1. Joints in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants, which are specified by reference to this Section.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

C. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Joint Sealants: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Sika Corporation

2. Pecora Corporation.

3. Bostik.

4. Dow Corning Corp.

5. GE Plastics.

6. Sonneborn Building Products, ChemRex, Inc.

7. Tremco, Inc.

8. The Sherwin-Williams Company.

9. Or equal.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L.

2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.

3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants:

1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Areas where concrete joint sealant will be adjacent to concrete other than standard gray, sealant color shall match adjacent color as approved by Architect.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5
C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

E. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

G. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193.

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

H. Installation of Preformed Tapes: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions.

I. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.

2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking tape.

3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.

4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6
J. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping, taking care not to pull or stretch material, producing seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures where expansion of sealant requires acceleration to produce seal, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 JOINT-SEALANT LOCATION
A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component.

1. Products:
a. SikaFlex 1A or 15LM by Sika Corp.
b. Dynatrol I-XL by Pecora.
c. Stampede 1 by The Sherwin-Williams Company.

2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

3. Applications:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

B. Exterior Metal Lap Joint Sealant: Silicone, Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, noncuring.

1. Products:
a. SikaSil WS-295 Silicone by Sika Corp.
b. 895 Silicone or Sil-Span by Pecora.

2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

3. Applications:
a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work.
b. Concealed sealant bead in siding overlaps.

C. General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable.

1. Products:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7
a. AC-20 manufactured by Pecora.
b. 950A manufactured by The Sherwin-Williams Company.

2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

3. Applications:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

D. Interior Floor Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, chemically-curing, cold-applied, self-leveling elastomeric sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; two-part.

1. Products:
a. SikaFlex 2C SL or NS with TG Additive by Sika Corp.
b. NR-200 self-leveling polyurethane and/or DYNATRED non-sag, traffic-grade polyurethane sealants by Pecora.
c. Stampede 2SL by The Sherwin-Williams Company.

2. Primer: SikaFlex 429 Primer; P-150, P-75 or P-200.

3. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

4. Applications: Use for joints up to 1-1/2 inches.
a. Expansion joints in floors.

E. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, chemically-curing, cold-applied, self-leveling elastomeric sealant; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M and A; two-part.

1. Products:
a. NR-200 Urexpan and/or DYNATRED non-sag, traffic-grade polyurethane sealant by Pecora or equal.
b. Stampede 2NS by The Sherwin-Williams Company.

2. Primer: SikaFlex 429 Primer; P-150, P-75 or P-200.

3. Color: Gray or Limestone.

4. Applications:
a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging.

1. Products:
a. BC-158 sealant by Pecora.
b. WL Silicone Rubber by The Sherwin-Williams Company.

2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent.

4. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F.

5. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 30.

G. Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding.

1. Products:
a. SikaSil WS 290 or WS 295 by Sika Corp.
b. 864 LM Architectural silicone or 890 silicone sealant by Pecora. c. 790 by Dow Corning Corporation.
d. WL Silicone Ultra WL09210.

2. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.

3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.

4. Applications:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8
a. Interior or exterior for joints 1/8 to 1-1/2 inch wide. b. Exterior use at expansion joints in masonry where substantial movement is expected. c. Glazing application.

END OF SECTION 079200
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1
SECTION 081113 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section “Flexible Sheet Flashing” for flashing windows, door, and other openings.

2. Division 8 Section “Flush Wood Doors” for wood door with steel frames.

3. Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” for door hardware for hollow metal doors.

4. Division 8 Section “Glazing” for glazing requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, and finishes.

B. Other Action Submittals:

1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference designation for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.
a. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.
b. Indicated specific model number of door and frame.
c. Indicate steel sheet type (galvanized, non-galvanized, etc.) d. Indicate door and frame type (A, A1, B, C, etc.)
e. Indicated hardware group.
f. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. g. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with CBC 716.5 Opening Protection Ratings and Markings and NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL-10C.

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where required, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure per CBC Section 716.5.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with CBC 716.5 Opening Protection Ratings and Marking sand NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to CBC Section 716.6 Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing. Label each individual glazed lite.

C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with CBC Section 716.5.5.1 Glazing in Exit Enclosure and Exit Passageway Doors.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking.

Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of steel doors and frames that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Steel Doors and Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. (Basis of Design).

2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.

4. Or equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications for interior doors and frames.

C. Galvannealed (Metallic-Coated) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A60 metallic coating for exterior doors and frames.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4
F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143.

H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated.

Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel.

2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Standard Core: Honeycomb, U-factor of 0.69, R-value of 1.45. b. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Beveled edge. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches.

4. Vertical Edges for Double-Acting Doors: Round vertical edges with 2-1/8-inch radius.

5. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

6. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

7. Glazing/Vision lights indoors shall comply w/CBC Sec. 11B-404.2.11.

8. Vision, Narrow Lite, Half Glass Doors: Size as indicated on Drawings.

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from galvannealed (metallic-coated) steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush):
a. Face thickness: 16 gage (0.053 inch).
1) Product: Series L16 by Steelcraft.

C. Exterior Insulated Doors: Face sheets fabricated from galvannealed (metallic-coated) steel sheet.

Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush):
a. Face thickness: 16 gage (0.053 inch).
1) Product: Series L16 with insulated core by Steelcraft.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Frames: Fabricated from G-90, metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.

2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated.

3. Frame:
a. Interior: 16 gage thick steel sheet.
b. Exterior: 14 gage thick steel sheet.

4. Fabricate frames as full profile welded. Knocked down is not allowed.

5. Frames for Wood Doors: Same type as for steel doors.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS
A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6

2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances:

1. Standard doors and frames: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high.
4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.
5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metalstud partitions. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 7
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.

4. Hinges: Continuous hinges.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work.

5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.

H. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate not more than indicated when tested according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Air Infiltration Test.

1. Maximum Rate: 0.3 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.

2. Maximum Rate: 0.1 cfm/sq. ft. of area at an inward test pressure of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

B. Field-Applied Paint Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section “Painting”.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to CBC 716 and NFPA 80.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 9
b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.
e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.
f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

4. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to CBC 716.5 and NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to UBC Standard 7-2.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 10

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 081113
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) DOORS 081417 - 1
SECTION 081417 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Doors.

2. Fiberglass Resin Transfer Molded Door Frames.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” hardware not provided by FRP door manufacturer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including description of materials, components, fabrication, finishes, and installation.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections, and details, indicating dimensions, tolerances, materials, fabrication, doors, panels, framing, hardware schedule, and finish.

C. Samples:

1. Door: Submit manufacturer's sample of door showing face sheets, core, framing, and finish.

2. Color: Submit manufacturer's samples of standard colors of doors and frames.

D. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from qualified independent testing agency indicating doors comply with specified performance requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Project References: Submit list of successfully completed projects including project name and location, name of architect, and type and quantity of doors manufactured.

F. Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and cleaning instructions for doors, including maintenance and operating instructions for hardware.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Continuously engaged in manufacturing of doors of similar type to that specified, with a minimum of 25 years successful experience.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) DOORS 081417 - 2
B. Door and frame components from same manufacturer.

C. Evidence of a compliant documented quality management system.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying opening door mark and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials and finish from damage during handling and installation.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warrant doors, frames, and factory hardware against failure in materials and workmanship, including excessive deflection, faulty operation, defects in hardware installation, and deterioration of finish or construction in excess of normal weathering.

B. Warranty Period: 10 years starting on date of shipment. In addition, a limited lifetime (while the door is in its specified application in its original installation) warranty covering: failure of corner joinery, core deterioration, delamination or bubbling of door skin.

C. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester Doors and Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Special-Lite, Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. Chem-Pruf.

3. Overly/Tiger Door.

4. Simon Door Co. LLC.

5. Chase Doors Inc.

6. Or equal.

B. Product: SL-20 Sandstone Texture Doors with fiberglass reinforced polyester (FRP) face sheets by Special-Lite or equal.

1. Door Size: As indicated on the Drawings.

2. Construction:
a. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) DOORS 081417 - 3
b. Stiles and Rails: Aluminum extrusions made from prime-equivalent billet that is produced from 100% reprocessed 6063-T6 alloy recovered from industrial processes, minimum of 2-5/16-inch depth.
c. Corners: Mitered.
d. Provide joinery of 3/8-inch diameter full-width tie rods through extruded splines top and bottom integral to standard tubular shaped stiles and rails reinforced to accept hardware as specified.
e. Securing Internal Door Extrusions: 3/16-inch angle blocks and locking hex nuts for joinery. Welds, glue, or other methods are not acceptable. f. Furnish extruded stiles and rails with integral reglets to accept face sheets. Lock face sheets into place to permit flush appearance.
g. Rail caps or other face sheet capture methods are not acceptable. h. Extrude top and bottom rail legs for interlocking continuous weather bar. i. Meeting Stiles: Pile brush weatherseals. Extrude meeting stile to include integral pocket to accept pile brush weatherseals.
j. Bottom of Door: Install bottom weather bar with nylon brush weatherstripping into extruded interlocking edge of bottom rail.
k. Glue: Use of glue to bond sheet to core or extrusions is not acceptable

3. Face Sheet:
a. Material: Exterior grade UV resistant FRP, 0.120-inch thickness, finish color throughout.
b. Texture: Sandstone.
c. Color: Slate Grey.
d. Adhesion: The use of glue to bond face sheet to foam core is prohibited.

4. Core:
a. Material: Poured-in-place polyurethane foam.
b. Density: Minimum of 5 pounds per cubic foot.
c. R-Value: Minimum of 9.
d. ASTM E 84: Class A.

5. Cutouts:
a. Manufacture doors with cutouts for required vision lites, louvers, and panels. b. Factory install vision lites, louvers, and panels.

6. Hardware:
a. Premachine doors in accordance with templates from specified hardware manufacturers and hardware schedule.
b. Factory install hardware: Coordinate with project door hardware.

2.2 FRP FRAMES
A. Size and Type: As indicated on the Drawings.

B. Materials: 3/16” thick solid pultruded FRP profiles having no corrosive components or reinforcement.

C. Assembly: Knock down (KD) for field assembly.

D. Corner Construction: Mitered with 2” x 2” x 3/8” pultruded FRP angle reinforcement with interlocking pultruded FRP brackets.

E. Reinforcing: ¼” pultruded FRP chemically welded at all hinge, strike and closer locations.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) DOORS 081417 - 4
F. Anchors: Furnished with type as specified on drawings.

G. Fasteners for reinforcing: 18-8 Stainless Steel.

H. Finish: Match doors as approved by Architect.

2.3 HARDWARE
A. The special nature of this material requires that all related hardware as specified must be furnished and installed by the door frame manufacturer to maintain product quality and function as well as to ensure sufficient support/reinforcement, precision tooling and proper sealing methods are provided.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive doors. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ensure openings to receive frames are plumb, level, square, and in tolerance.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install doors plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack.

C. Anchor frames securely in place.

D. Separate aluminum from other metal surfaces with bituminous coatings or other means approved by Architect.

E. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and backseal.

F. Install exterior doors to be weathertight in closed position.

G. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as approved by Architect.

H. Remove and replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIBERGLASS REINFORCED POLYESTER (FRP) DOORS 081417 - 5

3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust doors, hinges, and locksets for smooth operation without binding.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean doors promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that would damage finish.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed doors to ensure that, except for normal weathering, doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION 081417
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1
SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 9 Section “Painting” for field applied finishes.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish.

D. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of access doors and frames that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Access Doors and Frames: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Karp Associates Inc.

2. Acudor.

3. Milcor Inc.

4. Nystrom, Inc.

5. MIFAB.

6. Or equal.

2.2 STEEL MATERIALS
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products.

2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Steel Sheet: Cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Factory Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Field Finish: Factory prime for field painting as specified in Division 9 “Painting”.

D. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3

2.3 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Recessed Door to Receive Drywall Type:

1. Fire-Rated: Model 450FR by Karp.

2. Non-Fire-Rated: Model RDW by Karp.

3. Frame shall be 14 gage steel and doors shall be 16 gage steel.

4. Door shall be recessed 1 inch.

5. Trim shall be galvanized steel dry wall bead.

6. Hinge shall be concealed pivoting rod type.

7. Locks shall be flush and screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam and studs, or shall be key operated cylinder lock with automatic dust shutter.

8. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey coat.

9. Door Sizes:
a. As indicated on Drawings.

10. Field Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section “Painting”.

B. Flange Type:

1. Fire-Rated: Model KRP-250 by Karp.

2. Non-Fire-Rated: Model DSC-214M by Karp.

3. Frame shall be 14 gage steel and doors shall be 16 gage steel.

4. Flange: One-piece construction, 3/4 inch wide.

5. Hinge shall be concealed continuous piano hinge.

6. Locks shall be flush and screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam and studs, or shall be key operated cylinder lock with automatic dust shutter.

7. Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive electrostatic powder, baked grey coat.

8. Door Sizes:
a. As indicated on Drawings.

9. Field Finish: Comply with Division 9 Section “Painting”.

2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.

1. Exposed Flanges: Nominal 1 to 1-1/2 inches wide around perimeter of frame.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 4

2.5 FINISHES
A. Field finish per Division 9 Section “Painting”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION 083113
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TRANSACTION WINDOWS 085625 - 1
SECTION 085625 – TRANSACTION WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Standard Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes following:

1. Transaction Aluminum Windows.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Concurrent Review Requirements: Submit submittals of this section with following sections.

1. Division 8 Section “Glazing”.

B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of window indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:

1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.

2. Joinery details.

3. Glazing details.

D. Product Schedule: For windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of window. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TRANSACTION WINDOWS 085625 - 2
C. Source Limitations: Obtain windows through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and with GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to windows including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

2. Review and discuss the finishing of windows that is required to be coordinated with the finishing of other aluminum and stainless-steel work for color and finish matching.

3. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing, flashing, weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes.

4. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weathertight exterior building envelope.

5. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify window openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or condensation.
c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.
d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal weathering.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TRANSACTION WINDOWS 085625 - 3

2. Warranty Period:
a. Window: Two years.
b. Glazing: Five years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Transaction Windows:

1. C. R. Laurence of North America. (Basis of Design)

2. QuickServ.

3. Covenant Security Equipment.

4. Ready Access.

5. Nissen and Co. Inc.

6. Or equal.

2.2 TRANSACTION WNDOWS
A. Product: Cashier Window unit, Catalog Number: SCW103N by C. R. Laurence or equal.

1. Materials: Aluminum Extrusion; Tempered Safety Glass; Stainless Steel.

2. Finishes: Frame - Satin Anodized; Shelf - Brushed Stainless Steel #4 Finish.

3. Glazing: 1/4 inch Tempered Safety Glass.

4. Finish: Satin Anodized.

5. Includes Stainless Steel Shelf with Built-In Deal Tray and Speak-Thru.

6. Frame Satin Anodized x Shelf Brushed Stainless Steel.

7. Cashier Window unit has a stationary tempered 1/4 inch clear glass window surrounded by a satin finish aluminum frame.

8. A Cat. No. 834A Speak-Thru is supplied with the window, and the unit is mounted on a stainless steel shelf with recessed coin and cash tray.

9. The shelf assembly measures 30" wide x 18" deep x 2"thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction.

C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TRANSACTION WINDOWS 085625 - 4
D. Separate aluminum, stainless-steel, and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.

3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Clean aluminum and stainless-steel surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

B. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

END OF SECTION 085625
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 1 SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions of Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. This Section includes the following, but is not necessarily limited to:

1. Door Hardware, including electric hardware.

2. Gate Hardware.

3. Thresholds, gasketing and weather-stripping.

4. Door silencers or mutes.

C. Related Sections: The following sections are noted as containing requirements that relate to this Section, but may not be limited to this listing.

1. Division 8: Section - Steel Doors and Frames.

1.03 REFERENCES (USE DATE OF STANDARD IN EFFECT AS OF BID DATE.) A. 2022 California Building Code, CCR, Title 24.

B. BHMA – Builders’ Hardware Manufacturers Association
C. CCR – California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California State Accessibility Standards.

D. DHI – Door and Hardware Institute
E. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association.

1. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

2. NFPA 105 - Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies
F. UL - Underwriters Laboratories.

1. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies

2. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
G. WHI - Warnock Hersey Incorporated
H. SDI - Steel Door Institute
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 2

1.04 SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS
A. General: Submit in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.

B. Submit product data (catalog cuts) including manufacturers' technical product information for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

C. Submit six (6) copies of schedule organized vertically into “Hardware Sets” with index of doors and headings, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include following information:

1. Include a Cover Sheet with;
a. Job Name, location, telephone number.
b. Architects name, location and telephone number.
c. Contractors name, location, telephone number and job number. d. Suppliers name, location, telephone number and job number. e. Hardware consultant's name, location and telephone number.

2. Job Index information included;
a. Numerical door number index including; door number, hardware heading number and page number.
b. Complete keying information (referred to DHI hand-book "Keying Systems and Nomenclature"). Provision should be made in the schedule to provide keying information when available; if it is not available at the time the preliminary schedule is submitted.
c. Manufacturers' names and abbreviations for all materials. d. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used in the schedule. e. Mounting locations for hardware.
f. Clarification statements or questions.
g. Catalog cuts and manufacturer’s technical data and instructions.

3. Vertical schedule format sample:

Heading Number 1 (Hardware group or set number – HW -1)

(a) 1 Single Door #1 - Exterior from Corridor 101 (b) 90 (c) RH

(d) 3' 0"x7' 0" x 1-3/4" x (e) 20 Minute (f) WD x HM

(g) 1 (h) (i) ea (j) Hinges - (k) 5BB1HW 4.5 x 4.5 NRP (l) ½ TMS (m) 626 (n) IVE 2 6AA 1 ea Lockset - ND50PD x RHO x RH x 10-025 x JTMS 626 SCH (a) - Single or pair with opening number and location. (b) - Degree of opening (c) - Hand of door(s) (d) - Door and frame dimensions and door thickness. (e) - Label requirements if any. (f) - Door by frame material. (g) - (Optional) Hardware item line #. (h) - Keyset Symbol. (i) - Quantity. (j) - Product description. (k) - Product Number. (l) - Fastenings and other pertinent information. (m) - Hardware finish codes per ANSI A156.18. (n) - Manufacture abbreviation.

D. Make substitution requests in accordance with Division 1. Substitution requests must be made prior to bid date. Include product data and indicate benefit to the project. Furnish samples of any proposed substitution.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 3 E. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

F. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Furnish as-built/as-installed schedule with close-out documents, including keying schedule and transcript, wiring/riser diagrams, manufacturers’ installation and adjustment and maintenance information.

H. Fire Door Assembly Testing: Submit a written record of each fire door assembly to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) for future building inspections.

I. LEED Certification Points: Submit information and certifications necessary to achieve maximum points for LEED certification; coordinate and cooperate with Owner and Architect in providing information necessary for required LEED rating.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, exit devices, etc.) from a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

1. Responsible for detailing, scheduling and ordering of finish hardware.

2. Meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing.

3. Stock parts for products supplied and are capable of repairing and replacing hardware items found defective within warranty periods.

C. Hardware Installer: Company specializing in the installation of commercial door hardware with five years documented experience.

D. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and tested by UL or Warnock Hersey for given type/size opening and degree of label. Provide proper latching hardware, door closers, approved-bearing hinges and seals whether listed in the Hardware Schedule or not.

1. Where emergency exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, (with supplementary marking on doors' UL labels indicating "Fire Door to be Equipped with Fire Exit Hardware") provide UL label on exit devices indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".

E. Exit Doors: Operable from inside with single motion without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort.

F. Product packaging to be labelled in compliance with CA Prop 65, Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act of 1986.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 4

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of packaged hardware items to the appropriate locations (shop or field) for installation.

B. Hardware items shall be individually packaged in manufacturers’ original containers, complete with proper fasteners. Clearly mark packages on outside to indicate contents and locations in hardware schedule and in work.

C. Provide locked storage area for hardware, protect from moisture, sunlight, paint, chemicals, etc.

D. Contractor to inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each all are satisfied that count is correct.

1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide warranties of respective manufacturers’ regular terms of sale from day of final acceptance as follows:

1. Locksets: L Series (3) years – ND Ten (10) years.

2. Closers: Thirty (30) years.

3. Exit devices: Three (3) years.

4. All other hardware: Two (2) years.

1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE
A. Convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to beginning work of this section.

B. Attendance: Architect, Construction Manager, Contractor, Security Contractor, Hardware Supplier, Installer, Key District Personnel, and Project Inspector.

C. Agenda: Review hardware schedule, products, installation procedures and coordination required with related work. Review District's keying standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS
Item Manufacturer Acceptable Substitutes
Hinges Ives Hager, Stanley, McKinney
Locks, Latches
& Cylinders Schlage Or Approved Equal
Exit Devices Von Duprin Or Approved Equal
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 5 Closers LCN Or Approved Equal
Protection Plates Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Flush Bolts Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Dust Proof Strikes Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Coordinators Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Stops Ives Trimco, BBW, DCI
Overhead Stops Glynn-Johnson Or Approved Equal
Thresholds Zero Pemko, National Guard
Seals & Bottoms Zero Pemko, National Guard

2.02 MATERIALS
A. Hinges: Exterior out-swinging door butts shall be non-ferrous material and shall have stainless steel hinge pins. All doors to have non-rising pins.

1. Hinges shall be sized in accordance with the following:
a. Height:
1) Doors up to 42" wide: 4-1/2" inches.
2) Doors 43" to 48" wide: 5 inches.
b. Width: Sufficient to clear frame and trim when door swings 180 degrees. c. Number of Hinges: Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7'-5" in height. Add one for each additional 2 feet in height.

2. Furnish non-removable pins (NRP) at all exterior out-swing doors and interior key lock doors with reverse bevels.

B. Continuous Hinges: As manufactured by Ives, an Allegion Company. UL rated as required.

C. Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks and Latches: Schlage "ND" Series as scheduled with "Sparta" design, fastened with through-bolts and threaded chassis hubs.

1. Provide cylindrical locksets exceeding the ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Grade 1 performance standards for strength, security, and durability in the categories below:
a. Abusive Locked Lever Torque Test – minimum 3,100 inch-pounds without gaining access
b. Offset lever pull – minimum 1,600 foot pounds without gaining access c. Vertical lever impact – minimum 100 impacts without gaining access

2. Cycle life - tested to minimum 16 million cycles per ANSI/BHMA A156.2 Cycle Test with no visible lever sag or use of performance aids such as set screws or spacers

3. UL 10C for 4’-0” x 10’-0” 3-hour fire door.

4. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.

5. Provide solid steel anti-rotation through bolts and posts to control excessive rotation of lever.

6. Provide lockset that allows lock function to be changed to over twenty other common functions by swapping easily accessible parts.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 6

7. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset, unless noted otherwise, with 1/2 inch latch throw capable of UL listing of 3 hours on a 4’ x 10’ opening. Provide proper latch throw for UL listing at pairs.

8. Provide locksets with separate anti-rotation thru-bolts, and no exposed screws.

9. Provide independently operating levers with two external return spring cassettes mounted under roses to prevent lever sag.

10. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to protect trim.

11. Provide wired electrified options as scheduled in the hardware sets. a. 12 through 24 volt DC operating capability, auto-detecting b. Selectable EL (fail safe)/EU (fail secure) operating mode via switch on chassis c. 0.230A (230mA) maximum current draw
d. 0.010A (10mA) holding current
e. Modular / “plug in” request to exit switch

12. Lever Trim: Solid cast levers without plastic inserts, and wrought roses on both sides.

D. Schlage “L” Series as scheduled with “17” Style Lever and “A” Style Rose.

1. Locksets to comply with ANSI A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 and Security Grade 1 with all standard trims. Locksets shall also comply with UL10C Positive Pressure requirements

2. Lock case shall be manufactured with heavy 12 gauge steel with fully wrapped design.

Lock cases with exposed edges are not acceptable. Lock case shall be multi-functional allowing transformation to a different function without opening lock case.

3. Latchbolt shall have ¾” throw and be non-handed, field reversible without opening the lock case. Solid latchbolts and / or plastic anti-friction devices are not acceptable.

4. The deadbolt, when used, shall be 1” throw stainless steel with a ¾” internal engagement when fully extended.

5. All trim shall be through-bolted with the spring cages supporting the trim attached to the lock cases to prevent torqueing.

6. Levers to have independent rotation in both directions. Exterior lever assembly to be one-piece design attached by threaded bushing. Interior lever assembly shall be attached by screwless shank

7. Thru-bolt lever assemblies through the door for positive interlock. Locks using a through the door spindle for attachment are not acceptable. Spindles shall be independent, designed to “break-away” at a maximum of 75psi torque.

8. Hand of lock chassis to be changeable by simply moving one screw from one side to the case to the other and pulling and reversing the latchbolt.

9. Cylinders to be secured by a cast stainless steel, dual retainer. Locks utilizing screws and / or stamped retainers are not acceptable.

E. Deadlocks: Rotating cylinder trim rings of attack-resistant design. Mounting plates and actuator shields of plated cold-rolled steel. Mounting screws of ¼” diameter steel and protected by drill-resistant ball bearings. Steel alloy deadbolt with hardened steel roller.

Strike alloy deadbolt with reinforcer and two 3” long screws. ANSI A156.5, 2001 Grade 1 certified.

F. Exit devices: Von Duprin as scheduled.

1. Provide certificate by independent testing laboratory that device has completed over 1,000,000 cycles and can still meet ANSI/BHMA A156.3 - 2001 standards.

2. All internal parts shall be of cold-rolled steel with zinc dichromate coating.

3. Mechanism case shall have an average thickness of .140".

4. Compression spring engineering.

5. Non-handed basic device design with center case interchangeable with all functions.

6. All devices shall have quiet return fluid dampeners.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 7

7. All latchbolts shall be deadlocking with ¾” throw and have a self-lubricating coating to reduce friction and wear.

8. Device shall bear UL label for fire and or panic as may be required.

9. All surface strikes shall be roller type and utilize a plate underneath to prevent movement.

10. Lever Trim: “Breakaway” design, forged brass or bronze escutcheon with a minimum of .130” thickness, match lockset lever design.

11. Removable Mullions: Removable with single turn of building key. Securely reinstalled without need for key.

12. Furnish glass bead kits for vision lites where required.

13. All Exit Devices to be sex-bolted to the doors.

14. Panic Hardware shall comply with CBC Section 11B.404.2.7 and shall be mounted between 34" and 44" above the finished floor surface.
a. Provide exit devices UL certified to meet maximum 5 pound requirements according to the California Building Code section 11B-309.4, and UL listed for Panic Exterior Fire Exit Hardware.

G. Closers: LCN as scheduled. Place closers inside building, stairs, room, etc.

1. Door closer cylinders shall be of high strength cast iron construction with double heat treated pinion shaft to provide low wear operating capabilities of internal parts throughout the life of the installation. All door closers shall be tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 test requirements by a BHMA certified testing laboratory. A written certification showing successful completion of a minimum of 10,000,000 cycles must be provided.

2. All door closers shall be fully hydraulic and have full rack and pinion action with a shaft diameter of a minimum of 11/16 inch and piston diameter of 1 inch to ensure longevity and durability under all closer applications.

3. All parallel arm closers shall incorporate one piece solid forged steel arms with bronze bushings. 1-9/16” steel stud shoulder bolts, shall be incorporated in regular arms, holdopen arms, arms with hold open and stop built in. All other closers to have forged steel main arms for strength, durability, and aesthetics for versatility of trim accommodation, high strength and long life.

4. All parallel arm closers so detailed shall provide advanced backcheck for doors subject to severe abuse or extreme wind conditions. This advanced backcheck shall be located to begin cushioning the opening swing of the door at approximately 45 degrees. The intensity of the backcheck shall be fully adjustable by tamper resistant non-critical screw valve.

5. Closers shall be installed to permit doors to swing 180 degrees.

6. All closers shall utilize a stable fluid withstanding temperature range of 120 degrees F. to -30 degrees F. without requiring seasonal adjustment of closer speed to properly close the door.

7. Provide the manufactures drop plates, brackets and spacers as required at narrow head rails and special frame conditions. NO wood plates or spacers will be allowed.

8. Maximum effort to operate closers shall not exceed 5 lbs., such pull or push effort being applied at right angles to hinged doors. Compensating devices or automatic door operators may be utilized to meet the above standards. When fire doors are required, the maximum effort to operate the closer may be increased but shall not exceed 15 lbs. when specifically approved by fire marshal. All closers shall be adjusted to operate with the minimum amount of opening force and still close and latch the door. These forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a closed position. Per 11B-404.2.8.1, door shall take at least 5 seconds to move from an open position of 90 degrees to a position of 12 degrees from the latch jamb.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 8 H. Flush Bolts & Dust Proof Strikes: Automatic Flush Bolts shall be of the low operating force design. Utilize the top bolt only model for interior doors where applicable and as permitted by testing procedures.

1. Manual flush bolts only permitted on storage or mechanical openings as scheduled.

2. Provide dust proof strikes at openings using bottom bolts.

I. Door Stops:

1. Unless otherwise noted in Hardware Sets, provide wall type with appropriate fasteners.

Where wall type cannot be used, provide floor type. If neither can be used, provide overhead type.

2. Do not install floor stops more than four (4) inches from the face of the wall or partition (CBC Section 11B-307).

3. Overhead stops shall be made of stainless steel and non-plastic mechanisms and finished metal end caps. Field-changeable hold-open, friction and stop-only functions.

J. Protection Plates: Fabricate either kick, armor, or mop plates with four beveled edges.

Provide kick plates 10" high and 2" LDW. Sizes of armor and mop plates shall be listed in the Hardware Schedule. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless to match other hardware.

K. Thresholds: As Scheduled and per details.

1. Thresholds shall not exceed 1/2" in height, with a beveled surface of 1:2 maximum slope.

2. Set thresholds in a full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant complying with requirements in Division 7 “Thermal and Moisture Protection”.

3. Use ¼” fasteners, red-head flat-head sleeve anchors (SS/FHSL).

4. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.5.

L. Seals: Provide silicone gasket at all rated and exterior doors.

1. Fire-rated Doors, Resilient Seals: UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252.

Coordinate with selected door manufacturers' and selected frame manufacturers' requirements.

2. Fire-rated Doors, Intumescent Seals: Furnished by selected door manufacturer. Furnish fire-labeled opening assembly complete and in full compliance with UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252. Where required, intumescent seals vary in requirement by door type and door manufacture -- careful coordination required.

3. Smoke & Draft Control Doors, Provide UL10C Classified complies with NFPA 80 & NFPA 252 for use on “S” labeled Positive Pressure door assemblies.

M. Door Shoes & Door Top Caps: Provide door shoes at all exterior wood doors and top caps at all exterior out-swing doors.

N. Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 2 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive-rated door assemblies.

2.03 KEYING
A. Furnish a Proprietary Schlage masterkey system as directed by the owner or architect. Key system to be designated and combinated by the Schlage Master Key Department even if pinned by the Authorized Key Center, Authorized Security Center or a local authorized commercial dealer.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 9 B. A detailed keying schedule is to be prepared by the owner and/or architect in consultation with a representative of Allegion or an Authorized Key Center or Authorized Security Center.

Each keyed cylinder on every keyed lock is to be listed separately showing the door #, key group (in BHMA terminology), cylinder type, finish and location on the door.

C. Establish a new masterkey system for this project as directed by the keying schedule.

D. Furnish all cylinders in the Schlage Full Size Interchangeable Core (FSIC). Pack change keys independently (PKI). Owner to verify permanent cores.

E. Furnish construction keying for doors requiring locking during construction.

F. Furnish all keys with visual key control.

1. Stamp key “Do Not Duplicate”.

2. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on key.

G. Furnish all cylinders with visual key control.

1. Stamp (BHMA) key symbol on side of cylinder (CKC).

H. Furnish mechanical keys as follows:

1. Furnish 2 cut change keys for each different change key code.

2. Furnish 1 uncut key blank for each change key code.

3. Furnish 6 cut masterkeys for each different masterkey set.

4. Furnish 3 uncut key blanks for each masterkey set.

5. Furnish 2 cut control keys cut to the top masterkey for permanent I/C cylinders.

6. Furnish 1 cut control key cut to each SKD combination.

I. Furnish Schlage Padlocks and the cylinders to tie them into the masterkey system for gates, storage boxes, utility valve security, roof hatches and roll-up doors keyed as directed in the keying schedule.

1. Furnish KS43D2200 padlock for use with non-I/C Schlage cylinders. Furnish 47-413 (conventional) or 47-743-XP (PrimusXP) with above.

2. Furnish KS43G3200 padlock for use with FSIC Schlage cylinders. Furnish 23-030 (Classic / Everest) or 20-740 (PrimusXP) with above.

3. Furnish KS41D1200 padlock for use with SFIC Schlage cylinders. Furnish 80-037 (Everest-B) with above.

J. Furnish one Schlage cabinet lock for each cabinet door or drawer so designated on the drawings or keying schedule to match the masterkey system.

1. Furnish CL100PB for use with non-I/C Schlage cylinders.

2. Furnish CL77R for use with FSIC Schlage cylinders.

3. Furnish CL721G for use with SFIC Schlage cylinders.

2.04 FINISHES
A. Generally to be satin chrome US26D (626 on bronze and 652 on steel) unless otherwise noted.

B. Furnish push plates, pull plates and kick or armor plates in satin stainless steel US32D (630) unless otherwise noted.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 10 C. Door closers shall be powder-coated to match other hardware, unless otherwise noted.

D. Aluminum items to be finished anodized aluminum except thresholds which can be furnished as standard mill finish.

2.05 FASTENERS
A. Screws for strikes, face plates and similar items shall be flat head, countersunk type, provide machine screws for metal and standard wood screws for wood.

B. Screws for butt hinges shall be flathead, countersunk, full-thread type.

C. Fastening of closer bases or closer shoes to doors shall be by means of sex bolts and spray painted to match closer finish.

D. Provide expansion anchors for attaching hardware items to concrete or masonry.

E. All exposed fasteners shall have a phillips head.

F. Finish of exposed screws to match surface finish of hardware or other adjacent work.

G. All Exit Devices and Lock Protectors shall be fastened to the door by the means of sex bolts or through bolts.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify that doors and frames are square and plumb and ready to receive work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer.

B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.

C. Fire-Rated Door Assembly Inspection: Upon completion of the installation, all fire door assemblies shall be inspected to confirm proper operation of the closing device and latching device and that only the manufacturer’s furnished fasteners are used for installation and that it meets all criteria of a fire door assembly per NFPA 80 (Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives) 2018 Edition. A written record shall be maintained and transmitted to the Owner to be made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). The inspection of the swinging fire doors shall be performed by a certified FDAI (Fire Door Assembly Inspector) with knowledge and understanding of the operating components of the type of door being subjected to the inspection. The record shall list each fire door assembly throughout the project and include each door number, an itemized list of hardware set components at each door opening, and each door location in the facility.

3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and requirements of DHI.

B. Use the templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.

C. Mounting heights for hardware shall be as recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute.

Operating hardware will to be located between 34" and 44" AFF.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 11 D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

F. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber sealant.

G. If hand of door is changed during construction, make necessary changes in hardware at no additional cost.

3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made.

B. Clean adjacent surface soiled by hardware installation.

C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy, return to that work area and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware finishes, during the final adjustment of hardware.

E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the completion of the project, the Contractor accompanied by the Architectural Hardware Consultant, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper functions of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.

3.04 HARDWARE LOCATIONS
A. Conform to CCR, Title 24, Part 2; and ADAAG; and the drawings for access-compliant positioning requirements for the disabled.

3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor is responsible for providing the services of an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) or a proprietary product technician to inspect installation and certify that hardware and its installation have been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturers’ instructions and as specified herein.

3.06 SCHEDULE
A. The items listed in the following schedule shall conform to the requirements of the foregoing specifications.

B. While the hardware schedule is intended to cover all doors, and other movable parts of the building, and establish type and standard of quality, the contractor is responsible for Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 12 examining the Plans and Specifications and furnishing proper hardware for all openings whether listed or not. If there are any omissions in hardware groups in regard to regular doors they shall be called to the attention of the Architect prior to bid opening for instruction; otherwise, list will be considered Complete. No extras will be allowed for omissions.

C. The Door Schedule on the Drawings indicates which hardware set is used with each door.

Manufacturers Abbreviations (Mfr.)
GLY = Glynn-Johnson Corporation Overhead Door Stops
IVE = Ives Hinges, Pivots, Bolts, Coordinators, Dust Proof Strikes, Push Pull & Kick Plates, Door Stops &
Silencers
LCN = LCN Door Closers
SCH = Schlage Lock Company Locks, Latches & Cylinders
VON = Von Duprin Exit Devices
ZER = Zero International Thresholds, Gasketing & Weather-stripping HARDWARE GROUP NO. 01
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA ADA STOREROOM LOCK ND81TD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA INTERCHANGEABLE CORE VERIFY PERMANENT CORE WITH
OWNER
626
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436/FS438 AS REQ. 626 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 153A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 02
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA VANDL CLASSROOM LOCK ND94TD SPA 626 SCH
2 EA INTERCHANGEABLE CORE VERIFY PERMANENT CORE WITH
OWNER
626
1 EA OH STOP 100S 630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 13 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 03
1 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY W/INDICATOR LV9056T 17A L583-363 L283-722 626 SCH 1 EA INTERCHANGEABLE CORE VERIFY PERMANENT CORE WITH
OWNER
626
1 EA OH STOP 100S
(ONLY @ LOCATIONS WHERE
FS18S CAN'T BE USED)
630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 04
2 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA CONST LATCHING BOLT FB51P 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE
1 EA VANDL STOREROOM LOCK ND96TD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA INTERCHANGEABLE CORE VERIFY PERMANENT CORE WITH
OWNER
626
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE
2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB 689 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA MEETING STILE 44STST STST ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL

VERIFY FRAME MATERIAL FOR
SEALS

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 14 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 05
2 EA CONT. HINGE 224XY 628 IVE
1 EA CONST LATCHING BOLT FB51P 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE
1 EA ADA STOREROOM LOCK ND81TD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA INTERCHANGEABLE CORE VERIFY PERMANENT CORE WITH
OWNER
626
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE
2 EA MOUNTING BRACKET MB 689 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP EDA 689 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
2 EA FLOOR STOP FS18S BLK IVE
1 EA GASKETING 188SBK PSA BK ZER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA MEETING STILE 44STST STST ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD PER DETAIL
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 06
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ADA STOREROOM LOCK ND81TD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA INTERCHANGEABLE CORE VERIFY PERMANENT CORE WITH
OWNER
626
1 EA OH STOP 90S
(ONLY @ LOCATIONS WHERE
FS436/FS438 CAN'T BE USED)
630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP RW/PA
(MOUNT PULL SIDE)
689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS436/FS438 AS REQ. 626 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 07
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ADA STOREROOM LOCK ND81TD SPA 626 SCH
1 EA INTERCHANGEABLE CORE VERIFY PERMANENT CORE WITH
OWNER
626
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
HARDWARE GROUP NO. 08

CAN'T LOCATE OPENING
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
City of Roseville
Johnson Pool Phase 2 Door Hardware Section 08 71 00 - 15 HARDWARE GROUP NO. 09

HARDWARE BY ROLL UP DOOR
MFR

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 10
1 EA MULLION BY GATE FABRICATOR
2 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-PA-AX-98-EO-4'-WH 626 VON

BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY

GATE FABRICATOR

INSTALL OPERATING HARDWARE AT A HEIGHT BETWEEN 42" AND 44" HARDWARE GROUP NO. 11
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE LD-PA-AX-98-EO-4'-WH 626 VON

BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY

GATE FABRICATOR

INSTALL OPERATING HARDWARE AT A HEIGHT BETWEEN 42" AND 44"

END OF SECTION
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 092216 - 1
SECTION 092216 - NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior suspension systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Deflection track: List location of use.

C. Certification of Materials: For steel framing materials.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Construction Standards: Construction not on Drawings or referenced shall be as detailed in Technical Library by SSMA Technical Services.

D. Deflection Limits: Maximum deflection of following at 5 psf.

1. Gypsum board assemblies: L/240.

2. Ceramic tile: L/360.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of non-load bearing steel framing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 092216 - 2
a. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

2. Warranty Period: 1 year.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Non-Load-Bearing Steel Framing: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers.

1. California Expanded Metal Products Company (CEMCO).

2. Clark Dietrich.

3. Dale/Incor.

4. Western Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems.

5. Or equal.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 18 gage minimum.

B. Wire Hangers: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than

0.106 inch (12 gage) diameter.

C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (16 gage) and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 1-1/2 inch.

D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 0.0296 thick (20 gage).

E. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Leg Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 0.0296 thick (20 gage).

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 092216 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

2. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.
a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING 092216 - 4

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.

6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.

7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

END OF SECTION 092216
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Interior gypsum board.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 9 Section "Tiling" for tile backer board installed as substrates for ceramic tile.

2. Division 9 Section “Painting” for primers and finishes applied to gypsum board surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.

2. Finishes: Level 4 and 5 of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. 4 by 4 foot sample.
a. Finishes: For each finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each finish indicated.
c. Each areas such as walls, ceilings, and soffits.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.

4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of gypsum board that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Interior Gypsum Board: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Georgia Pacific. (Basis of Design)

2. USG Corporation.

3. National Gypsum Company.

4. Or equal.

B. Steel Trim Accessories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. USG Corporation.

2. Amico.

3. Or equal.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3

2.2 PANELS, GENERAL
A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM C 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

B. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch for new work.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

3. Products:
a. Toughrock Fireguard X by Georgia Pacific.
b. Type X by USG.
c. Or equal.

C. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

2. Use: Toilet rooms and janitor’s closets walls with painted finish. a. DensArmor Interior Guard by Georgia Pacific.
b. USG Mold Tough Firecode Core Gypsum Panels by USG.
c. XP Wallboard by National Gypsum.
d. Or equal.

D. Abuse-Resistant Type: Manufactured to produce greater resistance to surface indentation and through-penetration (impact resistance) than standard, regular-type and Type X gypsum board.

1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

3. Products:
a. ToughRock Mold Guard by Georgia Pacific.
b. Mold Tough Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels by USG.
c. Hi-Abuse XP Wallboard by National Gypsum.
d. Or equal.

2.4 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2. Shapes:
a. Cornerbead.
b. Bullnose bead.
c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint.
g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4
B. Aluminum Trim and Reveal: As specified in Division 9 Section “Portland Cement Plaster”.

2.5 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475.

B. Joint Tape: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Sealants shall comply with Sacramento Metro AQMD.

2.6 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant: Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant by USG or equal.

1. Sealants shall comply with Sacramento Metro AQMD.

D. Thermal and Acoustical Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation." E. Gypsum Board Adhesives:

1. High performance latex-based construction adhesive designed for gypsum board applications.

2. Adhesives shall comply with Sacramento Metro AQMD

3. Products:
a. Green Series SW-325 Shear & Drywall Adhesive by OSI. b. Drywall Adhesive GDWA by Grabberman.
c. Or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

3.3 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

3. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

4. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6

5. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Comply with GA 214 for Level definitions.

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.

2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for ceramic tile or acoustical tile.

3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.

4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view with flat paint finish. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

5. Level 5: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view with non-flat paint finish. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 9 Sections.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION 092900
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 1
SECTION 093000 - TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Ceramic tile.

2. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations.

3. Cementitious backer units installed as part of tile installations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile." C. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Accessibility Requirements for Tile Flooring:

1. Ceramic and Quarry Tile Flooring shall be stable, firm, and slip resistant. CBC Section 11B-302.1.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

1. Propose locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints if not indicated on Drawings.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 2
C. Installation Method: Show TCA installation method number for each tiled area in tabulated form.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

E. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer.

G. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of ceramic tile and accessories that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 3

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ceramic Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp.

3. Crossville Ceramics Company, L.P.

4. Interceramic.

5. Bedrosians.

6. Emser Tile.

7. Or equal.

B. Setting, Grouting Materials: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Custom Building Products.

2. LATICRETE International Inc.

3. MAPEI Corporation.

4. Sienna.

5. Tec by H.B. Fuller.

6. Or equal.

C. Sheet Waterproofing for Tile Installation: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS. (Basis of Design)

2. Schluter; KERDI XL.

3. Or equal.

D. Coated Glass Mat Gypsum Backer Board:

1. Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer by National Gypsum.

2. Durock Brand Glass-Mat Tile Backerboard by USG.

3. DensShield Tile Backer by Georgia Pacific (GP).

4. Or equal.

E. Metal Edge Strips and Transitions: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following manufacturers.

1. Schluter Systems (Basis of Design).

2. Blanke.

3. Or equal.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 4

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Tiles and Trim: As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes.

B. Comply w/ the following:

1. Changes in level of 1/4 inch high maximum shall be permitted to be vertical and without edge treatment. - 11B-303.2

2. Changes in level between 1/4 inch high minimum and 1/2 inch high maximum shall be beveled with a slope not steeper than 1:2.- 11B-303.3.

C. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503 with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish.

1. Vendor: White Georgia Marble Co.

2. Description: Match Architect's sample.

2.5 SHEET WATERPROOFING FOR TILE INSTALLATIONS
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10.

B. Thin (1/32 inch) bonded, load bearing sheet membrane for waterproofing. Alloy made from Chlorinated Polyethylene (CPE) with nonwoven fabric laminated to both sides.

1. System Performance: 1-14 “Extra Heavy Service” cycles per ASTM C627.

2. Hardness: 82 shore A per ASTM D2240.

3. Tensile Strength: 1600 psi per ASTM D412 Die C.

4. Elongation: 44% per ASTM D412 Die C.

5. Tear Strength: 400 psi per ASTM D624 Die C.

6. Shear Strength: Pass per ANSI A118.10-1993.

7. Shear Strength - Water Immersion: Pass per ANSI A118.10-1993.

8. Fungus & microorganism Resistance: Pass per ANSI A118.10-1993.

9. Seam Strength: Pass per ANSI A118.10-1993.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 5

10. Waterproofness: Pass per ANSI A118.10-1993.

C. Product: Kerdi System by Schluter or equal.

1. Description: Polyethylene Membrane: 0.008 inch thick, orange with polypropylene fleece laminated on both sides.

2. Meets or exceeds requirements of the "American national standard specifications for load bearing, bonded, waterproof membranes for thin-set ceramic tile and dimension stone installation A118.10.

3. Evaluated by ICC-ES. See Report No. ESR-2467.

4. Accessories: Schluter-Kerdi-Drain.
a. Plastic floor drain 11-25/32 inch diameter, trapezoid-perforated, integrated bonding flange.
b. Polypropylene Fleece: Thermally laminated to surface and hubbed connection to 2 inch drainpipe.
c. Grate Assembly: Includes 4 x 4 inch square grate, height adjustment collar, and lateral adjustment ring with trapezoid perforations.

2.6 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following:

1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive.
a. For wall applications, provide nonsagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2. Products:
a. MAPEI: Ultraflex 2, Walls: MAPEI Ultralite.
b. 254 Platinum by Laticrete.
c. Custom Building Products: MegaFlex.
d. Or equal.

B. Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use.

2. Products:
a. MAPEI: Kerapoxy IEG.
b. SpectraLock Pro by Laticrete.
c. Custom Building Products: 100% Solids Epoxy Grout.
d. Or equal.

2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 6
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated.

2.8 TILE BACKER UNITS
A. Coated Glass Mat Gypsum Backer Boards:

1. Product: Gold Bond eXP Tile Backer by National Gypsum or equal. a. Meets ASTM C 1178 Standard Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel.
b. An acrylic coated moisture and mold resistant gypsum panel specially designed for use as a substrate for tile applications in high moisture areas. c. Acrylic coated fiberglass facer provides an integral water barrier, eliminating the need for a separate water barrier.
d. Manufactured with an enhanced moisture and mold resistant core and facer. The facer is composed of an acrylic coated fiberglass mat which provides superior moisture resistant capabilities.
e. Recommended as a substrate for tile and other finishes in both wet and non-wet areas, areas of high humidity and fire-rated assemblies. It is ideally suited for interior walls and ceilings.
f. GREENGUARD Certified for microbial resistance per ASTM D 6329. g. Resists the growth of mold per ASTM D 3273 with a score of 10, the best possible rating.
h. Achieves a flame spread of 0 and smoke developed of 0 per ASTM E 84. i. 5/8" eXP Tile Backer contains a Fire-Shield Type X gypsum core and is approved for inclusion in specific UL fire-rated designs.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: ADA compliant, angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, in aluminum finishes selected by Architect.

1. Outside Corners: ECK-E by Schluter or equal.

2. Exposed Edges: JOLLY by Schluter or equal.

C. Transitions: ADA compliant, various shapes, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic designed specifically for flooring applications, in aluminum finishes selected by Architect.

1. Reno, Reno-T, Reno-U, Reno-TK, and Reno-Ramp by Schluter or equal.

2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 7
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. a. Sub-floor and Vertical Surfaces: 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.

3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials.

B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards.

1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 8
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules.

C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates.

G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards:

1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.

3.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION
A. Install cementitious backer units and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION
A. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has been tested to determine that it is watertight.

3.6 WALL TILE INSTALLATION
A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI settingbed standards.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TILING 093000 - 9

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove epoxy grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.8 WALL TILE INSTALLATION, TCNA ASSEMBLY
A. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation on waterproof membrane over coated glass-mat, waterresistant backer board (ASTM C1658); thin-set mortar; TCNA W245 and ANSI A108.

1. Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar.

2. Grout: Chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-grouting epoxy.

END OF SECTION 093000
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 1
SECTION 096723 – RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Resinous Flooring.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Descriptive data and specific recommendations for surface preparation, mixing, and application of materials.

B. Acceptance Sample: As required by owner, one foot square (1 ft. by 1 ft.) sample of the specified flooring system applied to hardboard or similar backing for rigidity and ease of handling.

C. Maintenance data: Give instructions for general maintenance and repair of surfaces and finishes.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications:

1. Pre-qualification requirements: Only approved applicators, licensed by manufacturer shall be considered for qualification.

2. Each approved applicator shall have been qualified by the manufacturer as knowledgeable in all phases of surface preparation.

3. Each approved applicator must have three (3) years experience of installing resinous flooring systems and submit a list of five projects/references as a prequalification requirement. At least one of the five projects/ references must be of equal size, quantity, and magnitude to this project as a prequalification requirement. Owner has the option to personally inspect the projects/references to accept or reject any of the Contractors prior to bid time as a prequalification requirement.

B. Subcontractor Qualifications:

1. The only approved and specified subcontractors for this resurfacing work shall be for shotblast cleaning of the concrete substrate.

C. Acceptance Sample:

1. Representative sample of the specified flooring system shall be submitted to the Owner prior to the bidding phase of the project. All bidders shall inspect the “acceptance sample” before submitting their bids.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 2

2. The installed flooring system shall be similar to the acceptance sample in thicknesses of respective film layers, color, texture, overall appearance and finish.

D. Bond Testing: Surface preparation efforts shall be evaluated by conducting Bond Tests at the site prior to application of the flooring system(s).

E. Pre-Job Meeting

1. Owner requires a Pre-Job Meeting with representatives of Owner, Contractor/Applicator, and Material Manufacturer in attendance. The agenda shall include a review and clarification of this specification, application procedures, quality control, inspection and acceptance criteria, and production schedules.

2. Applicator is not authorized to proceed until this meeting is held or waived by Owner.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HADLING
A. All material shall be delivered in original Manufacturer’s sealed containers with all pertinent labels intact and legible.

B. Follow all Manufacturer’s specific label instructions and prudent safety practices for storage and handling.

1.6 PROJECT / SITE CONDITIONS
A. Material, air, and surface temperatures shall be in the range recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer.

B. Relative humidity in the specific location of the application shall be as recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer.

C. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer.

D. Vapor barriers and/or suitable means shall have been installed beneath grade slabs to prevent vapor transmission.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace flooring that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Resinous Flooring:

1. Dex-O-Tex. (Basis of Design)

2. Stonhard.

3. Key Resin Company.

4. Or equal.

2.2 RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Product: Terracolor, Troweled Epoxy Floor by Dex-O-Tex or equal.

1. Composition:
a. Thin-section, trowel applied, decorative flooring system, designed to produce a seamless floor and cove base.
b. Installed at 3/16” to 1/4” thickness.
c. Pre-engineered decorative aggregates embedded in a colored epoxy matrix. It is finished with clear epoxy.
d. May be applied over new and existing concrete, metal or wood substrates.

1. Finished with topcoats of clear (gloss) or matte finish:
a. Dex-O-Tex Posi-Tred CR when subjected to extreme environmental conditions. b. Quik-Glaze a highly chemical and abrasion resistant polyurea topcoat.

2. Antimicrobial Additive incorporating an anti-microbial biocide, which protects against growth of algae, bacteria, fungi, mold, mildew, yeast, etc.

3. Test Data:
a. Compressive Strength (Resin, Hardener & Aggregate) per ASTM C579: 10,000 psi. b. Compressive Strength (Resin and Hardener) per ASTM D695: 11,000 psi. c. Tensile Strength (Resin, Hardener & Aggregate) per ASTMC307: 1,400 psi. d. Tensile Strength (Resin and Hardener) per ASTM D638: 5,000 psi. e. Flextural Strength per ASTM C580: 4,000 psi.
f. Surface Hardness per ASTM D2240, Shore D: 80-85>
g. Adhesion per ASTM D4541: > 400 psi.
h. Flammability per ASTM D635: Self-extinguishing by this test (0.6”). i. Flammability per ASTM E-648, FTMS 372, PA 253, NBSIR 75-950Critical Radian Heat Flux: > 1.07 Watts/cm2
j. Abrasion Resistance (CS17, 1000gr load, Cycles) per ASTM D4060: 0.04 gr. k. Indentation Characteristics MIL-D-3134: >1.0%
l. Impact Resistance Gardner Impact Test (160 lbs.): No cracking or detachment. m. Microbial Resistance per ASTM G21: Passes Rating 1.

4. Primer: Vapor Control Primer 200.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
RESINOUS FLOORING 096723 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Concrete - Provide a substrate that is free from any curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, grease, oil or any other contaminates. Shot blast (brush blast) or diamond grind substrate to provide an acceptable surface profile for subsequent application.

3.2 PRIMING
A. Apply vapor control primer by squeegee or roller at rate of 225 s.f./mixed gallons.

3.3 FLOOR APPLICATION
A. General: Apply each component of epoxy resin composition flooring system according to manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic flooring surface of thickness indicated.

B. Bond Coat: Apply bond coat over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Body Coat: Over primer, trowel apply epoxy mortar mix at nominal 1/4-inch thickness; hand or power trowel. When cured, sand or grind if necessary to remove trowel marks and roughness.

D. Finish or Sealing Coats: After body coat has cured sufficiently, apply grout and finish coats of type recommended by flooring manufacturer to produce finish matching approved sample and in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by manufacturer.

1. Final finish coat shall be in color and skid retardant profile as approved by the Architect.

2. Finished floor shall be 1/4" thick, uniform in color and free of trowel marks.

E. Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces at locations shown to form cove base height of 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. Follow manufacturer's instructions and details including taping, mixing, priming, troweling, sanding, and top-coating of cove base.

3.4 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Cure epoxy resin composition flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent contamination during application stages and before completing curing process.

Close application area for a minimum of 24 hours.

B. Protect finished floor with wax paper. Use Masonite, if rolling load traffic exists.

C. Clean with manufacturer recommended cleaner.

END OF SECTION 096723
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PAINTING 099100 - 1
SECTION 099100 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Surface Preparation.

2. Field application of paints, stains, varnishes, and other coatings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data - Submit product data sheets for each product.

B. Samples:

1. Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and systems selected with specified coats cascaded.

2. Submit on suitable backing, 8x10 inch size.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PAINTING 099100 - 2
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

B. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

C. Environment Requirements:

1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations as to environmental conditions under which coatings and coating systems can be stored and applied.

2. Do not paint when there is a threat of rain within 24 hours or when surface or air temperatures are at or below 40 degrees.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Installer Warranty: 1 year.

1.8 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide following:

1. Minimum 1 gallon each product in original or new 1 gallon cans. a. Color spot each lid.
b. Identify with formula, location, product and date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Paints: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Kelly Moore. (Basis of Design)

2. Dunn-Edwards.

3. Sherwin Williams.

4. Vista Paint.

5. PPG.

6. Behr.

7. Or equal.

2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS
A. Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PAINTING 099100 - 3
B. Prepare pigments:

1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogenous coating.

2. For good flow and brushing properties.

3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. Do not proceed unless substrate is suitable.

C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums:

1. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.

2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent

3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTMD4442.

4. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTMD4442.

3.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
A. General:

1. Clean all exterior walls and surfaces of loose and scaly paint, dirt, dust, chalk, and other foreign matter by water-blasting using care not to damage substrate followed by hand scraping, sanding or wire brushing after surfaces are dry. Mildew must be treated with household bleach solution and rinsed thoroughly.

2. Patch, caulk, set protruding nails and repair all surfaces and cracks where necessary with suitable patching materials and smooth off to match adjacent surfaces.

3. Sand Glossy surfaces to dull surface and remove residue.

4. Remove mildew from affected surfaces with a solution of Tri-Sodium Phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow to dry completely.

5. Existing surfaces to be recoated shall be thoroughly cleaned and de-glossed by sanding or other means prior to priming and painting. Patched and bare areas shall be spot primed with the same primer as specified for new work.

6. Rusty metal: Scrape, sand or wire wheel, feathering edges to sound coating. Dust surfaces.

Topcoat.

7. Remove soil and body oils completely from surfaces, including handrails, door edges and posts. Treat with Liquid Sandpaper or Dull-N-Bond.

8. Remove hardware, accessories, plates, fixtures and similar items not to be finished.

Reinstall at completion.

9. Paint edges of sink cut-outs.

B. Concrete Surfaces:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PAINTING 099100 - 4

1. Concrete surfaces shall be dry, clean and free from efflorescence, encrustations and other foreign matter. Any glazed surface shall be slightly roughened or etched. Curing compounds, bond breakers, release agents and other coatings shall be removed with a light sandblast or high pressure power wash.

C. CMU Surfaces:

1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, powder and other foreign matter from concrete block surfaces which are to be painted.

2. Unpainted CMU surfaces shall be cleaned with TSP. Rinse thoroughly. Surface shall be tested for adhesion. Prime as listed in materials section; allow to cure, then perform adhesion test with duct tape.

D. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove all oils and contamination from galvanized surfaces scheduled to be painted by washing with a compliant solvent wash.

E. Ferrous Metal: Remove grease, rust, scale, dirt and dust from ferrous metal surfaces. Primer coat shall be applied not less than 30 minutes, nor more than 3 hours after preparation of surface.

F. Primed Metal: Sand and scrape shop primed metal to remove loose primer and rust. Touch-up bare, abraded and damaged areas with metal primer. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous.

G. Wood Surfaces:

1. Remove dust, grit and foreign matter from wood surfaces. Sand surfaces and dust clean.

Spot prime knots, pitch streaks and sappy sections with a stain blocking primer where surfaces are to be painted. Fill nail holes, cracks and other defects after priming and spot prime repairs after patching material has fully cured.

2. Wood surfaces with peeling areas are to have edges of broken paint film sanded to a feather edge.

3. Back prime wood trim. Paint tops, bottoms, edges and cut-outs of doors.

H. Plaster Surfaces:

1. Plaster surfaces shall be dry and free from efflorescence, encrustations and foreign matter.

Fill cracks, holes and imperfections, smoothing repairs to match adjacent texture. Allow repairs to fully cure before priming.

2. Prime plaster surfaces with specified primer. Caulk all cracks.

I. Gypsum Board: Gypsum board shall be dusted clean and free from encrustations and other foreign matter.

J. Preparation of other surfaces shall be performed following specific recommendations of the coating manufacturer.

3.3 PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES
A. Maintenance painting will frequently not permit or require complete removal of all old coatings prior to repainting. However, all surface contamination such as oil, grease, loose paint, mill scale dirt, foreign matter, rust, mold, mildew, mortar, efflorescence, and sealers must be removed to assure sound bonding to the tightly adhering old paint. Glossy surfaces of old paint films must be clean and dull before repainting. Thorough washing with an abrasive cleanser will clean and dull Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PAINTING 099100 - 5
in one operation, or, wash thoroughly and dull by sanding. Spot prime any bare areas with an appropriate primer. Recognize that any surface preparation short of total removal of the old coating may compromise the service length of the system. Check for compatibility by applying a test patch of the recommended coating system, covering at least 2 to 3 square feet. Allow to dry one week before testing adhesion per ASTM D3359. If the coating system is incompatible, complete removal is required per ASTM D4259.

3.4 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved
E. Sand wood surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust particles just prior to applying next coat.

G. Stipple all edges and corners to conceal brush marks.

H. Paint entire trim element with like color. Painting of faces only is unacceptable. Trim surfaces must be wrapped with the trim color and not "faced off" or "Hollywooded".

I. Doors: Paint entire door unless otherwise noted, including door top and bottom edge surfaces.

J. Tinting: Tint each primer a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint primer to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of primer to distinguish each separate coat.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades and items not intended to receive paint. Install "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted surfaces.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Protection - Carefully protect areas where work is in progress from damage.

1. Provide and spread clean drop cloths when and where required to provide the necessary protection.

2. Immediately clean-up all accidental spatter, spillage, misplaced paint and restore the affected surface to its original condition.

B. Clean-up:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PAINTING 099100 - 6

1. Clean up debris daily per OSHA requirements.

2. At completion of work, remove all materials, supplies, debris and rubbish and leave each area in a clean, acceptable condition.

3. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.

3.7 SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A. Paint all new work and areas affected by new work, unless noted otherwise.

B. Do not paint or finish the following items:

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.

2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.

C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.

1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Paint shop primed items occurring in finished areas.

3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint.

4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles and convector and baseboard cabinets to match face panels.

3.8 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. CMU:

1. Flat – 100% Acrylic:
a. First Coat: Acrylic Block Filler.
b. Two Coats: 1240 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat or 1200 Color Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat.

B. Portland Cement Plaster and Concrete:

1. Flat – 100% Acrylic:
a. First Coat: 247 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Masonry Primer. b. Two Coats: 1240 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat or 1200 Color Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Flat.

C. Ferrous Metal:

1. Semi-Gloss – Alkyd / 100% Acrylic:
a. First Coat: CV740, Rust – Preventative White Primer. b. Two Coats: 1250 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss.

D. Galvanized Metal:

1. Semi-Gloss – Epoxy / 100% Acrylic:
a. Pretreatment: Jasco Metal Etch.
b. First Coat: 5725 DTM Acrylic/Primer Finish.
c. Second Coat: 1250 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss. d. Third Coat: 1250 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
PAINTING 099100 - 7
E. Wood Substrates-Including architectural woodwork-Latex System:

1. Semi-Gloss-100% Acrylic:
a. First Coat: 255 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Wood Primer. b. Second Coat: 1250 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel. c. Third Coat: 1250 Acry-Shield 100% Acrylic Exterior Semi-Gloss Enamel.

3.9 PAINT SYSTEMS -INTERIOR
A. Gypsum Board

1. Flat – Acrylic Copolymer:
a. First Coat: 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA Primer Sealer. b. Two Coasts: 550 Acry-Plex Interior Acrylic Flat Wall Paint.

2. Low Sheen – Acrylic Copolymer:
a. First Coat: 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA Primer Sealer. b. Two Coats: 1507 Enviro-Coat Zero VOC 100% Acrylic Interior Low Sheen.

3. Eggshell – Acrylic Copolymer / 100% Acrylic:
a. First Coat: 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA Primer Sealer. b. Two Coats: 1610 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic Interior Eggshell Enamel

4. Semi-Gloss - Acrylic Copolymer / 100% Acrylic:
a. First Coat: 971 Acry-Plex Interior PVA Primer Sealer. b. Two Coats: 1650 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic Interior Semi-Gloss.

5. Gloss – Acrylic Copolymer / 100% Acrylic:
a. First Coat: 971 Acry-Plex 100% Acrylic PVA Primer Sealer. b. Two Coats: 1680 Dura –Poxy+ 100% Acrylic Gloss.

B. Ferrous Metal:

1. Semi-Gloss – Alkyd / 100% Acrylic:
a. First Coat: CV740 Red Primer.
b. Two Coats: 1685 Dura-Poxy+ 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

C. Wood Substrates Including architectural woodwork Painted finish:

1. Semi-Gloss Finish
a. First Coat: 973 Acry-Plex Zero VOC Interior Wall Primer & Undercoat. b. Second Coat: 1685 Dura-Poxy+ 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss. c. Third Coat: 1685 Dura-Poxy+ 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss.

3.10 COLORS
A. To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of colors.

END OF SECTION 099100
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - 1
SECTION 099623 – GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Non-sacrificial, clear anti-graffiti coating system for masonry on exterior surfaces.

2. Graffiti Cleaners.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 9 Section “Painting” for other coatings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Written product list and description of products to be used with manufacturer's printed literature for each product.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Capable of providing field service representation during installation and who will approve the installer and application method.

B. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing this type of work and who has specialized in work similar to the type required for this project.

C. Mock-Up or Test Panels: Before full-scale application, test products to be used on a mock-up or test panels on the CMU being supplied to the project.

1. Review manufacturer's product data sheets to determine suitability of each product for each surface.

2. Apply products using manufacturer-approved application methods, determining actual requirements for surface preparation, coverage rate, number of coats, and application procedures.

3. After 48 hours, review effectiveness of protection, compatibility with substrates, and ability to achieve desired results.

4. Obtain approval by Designated Representative and Architect of workmanship, color, and texture before proceeding with work.

5. Test Panels: Inconspicuous sections of actual construction. a. Location and number as selected by Designated Representative. b. Size: 4 feet by 4 feet.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - 2
c. Repair unacceptable work to the satisfaction of the Designated Representative.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in time to avoid construction delays.

B. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels intact.

C. Store products protected from weather and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply products under conditions outside manufacturer's requirements, which include:

1. Surfaces that are frozen; allow complete thawing prior to installation.

2. Surface and air temperatures below 40 degrees F.

3. Surface and air temperatures above 95 degrees F.

4. When surface or air temperature is not expected to remain above 40 degrees F for at least 8 hours after application.

5. Wind conditions that may blow water repellents onto surfaces not intended to be treated.

6. Less than 24 hours after a rain.

7. When rain is expected less than 6 hours after installation.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of anti-graffiti coating system that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 2 years.

B. Installer Warranty: 1 year.

1.8 EXTRA STOCK
A. Minimum 1 gallon each product in original or new 1 gallon cans.

1. Color spot each lid.

2. Identify with formula, location, product and date.

B. Minimum 5 gallons of Graffiti Remover.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Anti-Graffiti System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - 3

1. Monochem. (Basis of Design)

2. Rain Guard.

3. Textured Coatings of America (TCA), Inc.

4. American Polymers.

5. Or equal.

2.2 ANTI-GRAFFITI SYSTEM
A. Product: Permashield Premium by Monochem.

1. Description: Non-sacrificial, intended for use on unpainted or painted concrete, masonry, stucco, prepared metal, EIFS, murals, signs and other surfaces. It creates a clear protective, UV resistant coating where graffiti tagging can be removed without affecting the appearance of the substrate.

2. Test Data:
a. Solids by Weight (ASTM D2369): 55% ±2.
b. VOC level (ASTM D3960): Zero.
c. Film appearance, Gloss 60° (ASTM D-523): 90.
d. Film appearance, Matte 60°(ASTM D-523): 4-6.
e. Mixed Viscosity @75°F (ASTM D2369): 85-90 KUs.
f. Tensile strength (ASTM D412-06a): 5950 PSI.
g. Elongation (ASTM D412-06a): 150%.
h. Modulus@100%Elongation: 4190 PSI.
i. Hardness, pencil, 2 weeks (ASTM D-530): 2H.
j. Taber Abrasion Resistance (ASTM D-4060): <45mgloss/1000 Cycles. k. Impact Resistance (ASTM D-2794) Reverse: 160 In/Lbs. l. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM 1653-85): 5.99% perms. m. Graffiti Resistance (ASTM D6578): Exceeded performance requirement (Level 3) Using Citrus Clean Super.
n. Outdoor Weathering (ASTM G155-05a): 8000 hours.
o. Cyclic Weathering (AASHTOR-31): No Blistering, Cracking, Checking, Softening or Delamination. Maximum Change of 10 Gloss Level.
p. Recoat Time: 4-6 Hours.
q. Dry through: 8-12 Hours.
r. Dry hard: 48 Hours.
s. Complete cure and hardness: 5 Days.

B. Coating System:

1. Unpainted (natural) Surfaces:
a. 1 Flood Coat: AQUASEALME12.
b. 2-3 coats: PERMASHIELD BASE COAT.
c. 2-coats: PERMASHIELD PREMIUM.

2. Painted Surfaces: Depending on the surface, apply one to two coats of base coat to create a pinhole free surface for finish coat.
a. 2-3 coats: PERMASHIELD BASE COAT.
b. 2-coats: PERMASHIELD PREMIUM.

2.3 GRAFFITI REMOVER
A. Product: CITRUS CLEAN SUPER (#9800) by Monochem.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - 4

1. Description: A water-miscible, easy to use, concentrated cleaner/remover. It is designed to remove and clean graffiti from surfaces that are protected with Permashield Premium.

2. Spray directly on the graffiti and allow 2 minutes of dwell time. Do not allow the cleaner to dry. Gently agitate with a stiff bristle nylon brush or nylon scour pad working the cleaner into the graffiti. Spray more cleaning solution to maintain a wet surface and to remove the dissolved graffiti. When graffiti removal is complete and all graffiti is dissolved, flush the surface thoroughly with water to remove all residue. If the removal is incomplete, allow the water on the surface to fully dry and repeat above steps.

3. Do not allow remover to dry on the surface.

4. CITRUS CLEAN SUPER is the required graffiti remover for Permashield Premium. Do not use solvents or other chemicals such as MEK, lacquer thinners, etc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrates are acceptable for product installation; do not begin until substrates meet manufacturer's requirements.

1. Masonry, including mortar and concrete plaster, must cure a minimum of 28 days prior to applying anti-graffiti coating system.

B. Do not begin until mock-up/test panels have been approved by Architect.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be treated prior to beginning application.

B. Repair, patch and fill cracks, voids, defects, and damaged areas to satisfaction of manufacturer.

Allow repair materials to cure completely.

C. Ensure that the surface is free of graffiti and contaminants such as dust, dirt, form oil, grease, wax, curing compounds, grime and loose paint. Clean the surface by any of the following methods, as approved by anti-graffiti coating system manufacturer:

1. Water blasting: Use water at a minimum pressure of 2,000 psi.

2. Steam cleaning: Use high, medium or low pressure depending on the condition of the surface.

3. Sandblasting: As required for a clean surface, remove sand with water rinse.

4. Cleaning solution: Scrub with a low residue, easily rinsed solution to remove all grease and wax build-up.

5. Sand paper or wire wool: Lightly etch surface, then remove all residue.

6. Acid etch: Rinse with appropriate acid, then neutralize and rinse surface thoroughly. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly for a minimum of 24 to 48 hours after rinsing.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, product data, and container label instructions.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
GRAFFITI-RESISTANT COATINGS 099623 - 5
B. Mix materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions; do not dilute unless permitted by manufacturer.

C. Prevent overspray, wind drift, and splash onto surfaces not to be treated.

D. Provide the services of the manufacturer's authorized field representative to verify that installed products comply with manufacturer's requirements and with the standard established by approved mock-up/test panels.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At completion of work, remove protective coverings.

B. If surfaces that should have been protected from damage by this work have been damaged, clean, repair or replace to the satisfaction of Architect.

C. Repair or replace damaged treated surfaces.

D. Protect completed work from damage during construction.

END OF SECTION 099623
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SIGNAGE 101400 - 1
SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Panel signs (room signs).

2. Exterior signs.

3. Signage accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.

1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, artwork, and braille layout.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sign material indicated that involves color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color selected:

1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required.

2. Approved samples will not be returned for installation into Project.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Maintenance Data: For signage cleaning and maintenance requirements to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative of signage manufacturer for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SIGNAGE 101400 - 2
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs.

1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish templates for installation of anchorage devices.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signage fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year.

B. Installer Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Signs: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Best Sign Systems Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. Apco Graphics Inc.

3. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.

4. Curcio Enterprises, Inc.

5. Mohawk Sign Systems.

6. Sign A Rama.

7. Or equal.

B. Exterior Signs: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Gemini, Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. A.R.K. Ramos Mfg. Co., Inc.

3. La Haye Bronze.

4. Metal Arts; Division of L & H Mfg.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SIGNAGE 101400 - 3

5. Mills Manufacturing. Inc.

6. Southwell Co.

7. Or equal.

2.2 PANEL ROOM SIGNS
A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.

1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally.

B. Product: Lucent Sign System by Best Sign Systems.

1. Profile: Rectangular.

2. Surface Textures: Matte.

3. Mounting: Mounting holes, architectural offsets.

4. Material Class: Custom.

5. Substrate Depth: 1/4 inch.

6. Performance Rating: Interior.

7. Copy: As indicated on Drawings.

2.3 BUILDING SIGNS
A. Dimensional Letters: As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.

B. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SIGNAGE 101400 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Signs placed on glazed surfaces, backing sign of the same material and color shall be applied on the opposite glazed surface.

3. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.

Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs:

1. Interior Signs on Smooth Substrates:
a. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces.

Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured.

2. Exterior and Interior Signs on Rough Substrates:
a. Mechanical Fasteners: Mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes.

Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer.
1) Fastener: Stainless steel screws, tamper-resistant flat head countersink. 2) Anchors: Suitable for secure attachment to substrate.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.

Protect signs from damage until acceptance by City.

END OF SECTION 101400
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 1
SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Solid Color Reinforced Composite (SCRC) toilet compartments.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.

2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of unit indicated.

D. Samples for Verification: Of each type of color and finish required for units, prepared on 6-inchsquare Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating toilet compartments without field measurements. Coordinate wall, floor, ceilings, and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 2

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of toilet compartments that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 15 year.

B. Installer Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Solid Color Reinforced Composite (SCRC) Units: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. Accu-Tec Manufacturing, Inc.

3. Accurate Partitions Corporation.

4. American Sanitary Partition Corporation.

5. Ampco, Inc.

6. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions.

7. Or equal.

2.2 SOLID COLOR REINFORCED COMPOSITE (SCRC) UNITS
A. Series: Sierra Series.

B. Model: 1092, overhead-braced.

C. Materials: Solid color reinforced composite (SCRC) material for stiles, panels, doors, and screens with Bobrick GraffitiOff coating, thermoset and integrally fused into homogenous piece.

1. Composition: Dyes, organic fibrous material, and polycarbonate/phenolic resins.

2. Surface Treatment: Non-ghosting, graffiti resistant surface integrally bonded to core through a series of manufacturing steps requiring thermal and mechanical pressure.

3. Edges: Same color as the surface.

4. High density polyethylene (HDPE) is not acceptable.

5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

D. Fire Resistance:

1. Smoke Developed Index (ASTM E 84): Less than 450.

2. Flame Spread Index (ASTM E 84): Less than 75.

3. National Fire Protection Association/International Building Code Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish: Class B.

4. Uniform Building Code: Class II.

E. Performance Requirements:

1. Graffiti Resistance (ASTM D 6578): Passed cleanability test; 5 staining agents.

2. Scratch Resistance (ASTM D 2197): Maximum load value exceeds 10 kilograms.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 3

3. Impact Resistance (ASTM D 2794): Maximum impact force exceeds 30 inch-pounds.

F. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung.

G. Stiles: Floor-Anchored stiles furnished with expansion shields and threaded rods.

1. Leveling Devices: 7 gauge, 3/16 inches thick, corrosion-resistant, chromate-treated, double zinc-plated steel angle leveling bar bolted to stile; furnished with 3/8 inch diameter threaded rods, hex nuts, lock washers, flat washers, spacer sleeves, expansion anchors, and shoe retainers.

2. Stile Shoes: One-piece, 22 gauge, 18-8, Type 304 stainless steel, 4 inch height; tops with 90 degree return to stile. One-piece shoe capable of adapting to 3/4 inch or 1 inch stile thickness and capable of being fastened (by clip) to stiles starting at wall line.

H. Wall Posts: Pre-drilled for door hardware, 18-8, Type 304, 16 gauge stainless steel with satin finish; 1 inch x 1-1/2 inches x 58 inches high.

I. Anchors: Expansion shields and threaded rods at floor connections as applicable. Threaded rods secured to supports above ceiling as applicable.

J. Hardware:

1. Compliance: Operable with one hand, without tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist, and force to operate does not exceed five pounds.

2. Emergency Access: Hinges, latch allow door to be lifted over keeper from outside compartment on inswing doors.

3. Materials: 18-8, Type 304, heavy-gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Chrome-plated “Zamak”. Aluminum, or extruded plastic hardware not acceptable.

4. Fastening: Hardware secured to door and stile by through-bolted, theft-resistant, pin-inhead Torx stainless steel machine screws into factory-installed, threaded brass inserts.

Fasteners secured directly into core not acceptable.
a. Threaded Brass Inserts: Factory-installed; withstand direct pull force exceeding 1500 lb per insert.

5. Clothes Hooks: Projecting no more than 1-1/8 inch from face of door.

6. Hardware Type: Institutional Hardware.
a. Latching: 14 gauge sliding door latch, 11 gauge keeper; latch slides on a shockresistant nylon track. Twist-style door latch operation not acceptable. b. Hinges: 16 gauge stainless steel, self-closing, 3 section hinges. c. Mounting Brackets: 18 gauge stainless steel and extend full height of panel. 1) U-Channels: Secure panels to stiles.
2) Angle Brackets: Secure stiles-to-walls and panels-to-walls.

K. Factory shall prep for all accessories to prevent drilling in the field.

L. Signage in all women’s stalls to include: “Please do not flush feminine hygiene products down the toilet.”
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.

2. Attach continuous wall brackets securely to walls using stainless steel fasteners spaced maximum 12 inches on center.

3. Attach panels and pilasters to continuous brackets with one-way sex bolts.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

3.2 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from true position: 1/4 inch. Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not exceed 1/4 inch.

B. Maximum variation from plumb: 1/8 inch.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Hardware Adjustment:

1. Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation.

2. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched.

3. Set hinges all accessible stalls to return to fully closed position.

END OF SECTION 102113
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1
SECTION 102600 – WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Corner guards.

B. Related Sections

1. Division 6 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork: for wood chair rails.

C. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, fire-testresponse characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall-protection unit indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. Include Samples of accent strips to verify color selected.

1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps, and field splices.

D. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.

E. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall-protection unit to include in maintenance manuals.

1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to plastic finishes and performance.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 2

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall-protection units through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impactresistant wall-protection units and are based on the specific system indicated.

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall-protection units with surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall-protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures.
b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.

2. Warranty Period: 5 years.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two, 4-foot- long units.

B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same production run as installed units.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Corner Guards: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Construction Specialties (C/S), Inc. (Basis of Design) Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 3
a. Corner Guards.

2. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; Division of RJF International Corporation. (Basis of Design)
a. Chair rail.

3. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.

4. Balco, Inc.

5. Pawling Corporation.

6. Or equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, highimpact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color throughout; thickness as indicated.

1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.

2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543.

3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.

4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.

5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view.

C. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to substrate indicated.

1. Use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.
b. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L.
c. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

2.3 WALL PROTECTION
A. Corner Guards:

1. Product: Model SM-20E 90° surface mounted corner guard with 3 inch legs, 1/4 inch radiused cover and recycled PVC-free thermoplastic retainer.

2. Material: PVC-Free thermoplastic, Acrovyn 3000.

3. Type: Surface mounted guards consisting of a continuous retainer with snap-on cover.

4. Color matched end caps to be provided for both partial and full height applications.

5. Attachment hardware shall be appropriate for wall construction.

6. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

B. Chair Rails: Comply with Division 6 Section “Interior Architectural Woodwork for wood chair rails.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 4

2.4 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall-protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.

Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

1. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

2. For impact-resistant wall-protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wallprotection system components.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.

1. Install impact-resistant wall-protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.

2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation.
a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches.
c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 5

3.4 CLEANING
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 102600
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1
SECTION 102800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes:

1. Toilet accessories.

2. Electric hand dryer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:

1. Construction details and dimensions.

2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation.

3. Material and finish descriptions.

4. Features that will be included for Project.

5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required.

1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.

C. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace toilet and bath accessories that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 1 year.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Toilet and Bath Accessories: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. American Specialties, Inc.

3. Bradley Corporation.

4. Or equal.

B. Underlavatory Guards: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Handy-Shield by Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. IPS Corp.

3. TCI Products.

4. Truebro, Inc.

5. Or equal.

C. Electric Dryers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. Excel Dryer Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.

3. American Dryer, Inc.

4. World Dryer Corp.

5. Dyson.

6. Pinnacle Dryer.

7. Or equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3
C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

F. Chrome Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).

G. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

H. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.3 TOILET ACCESSORIES
A. As indicated on Drawings.

2.4 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS
A. Product: Handy-Shield Maxx by Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. or equal.

1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies, that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings.

2. PVC insulator shall be 1/8" thick.

3. Meets Testing Standard ASTM E 84-07 per IBC Chapter 8. a. 25 flame spread.
b. 450 smoke index.

4. Surfaces to be soft, smooth, non-absorbent, easy to clean U/V inhibited, antimicrobial, antifungal properties.

5. Insulator shall have a dual fastening system which consists of fusion bonded Velcro fastener strips for full slit enclosure and tamper resistant, smooth, non-abrasive snaplocking fasteners.

2.5 ELECTRIC DRYER
A. Product: ThinAir Hand Dryer by Excel Dryer or equal.

1. Model:
a. TA-SB, Brushed Stainless Steel.

2. Construction:
a. All covers will be fastened to a base plate by one chrome plated tamper-proof bolt. b. Base plate shall be equipped with (3) 7/8" (22 mm) diameter knockouts, one of which is located on the right side and suitable for use with surface conduit. c. All internal parts shall be coated according to Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. requirements.
d. Entire mechanism shall be internally grounded, per UL requirements.

3. Mechanism:
a. Motor shall be a thermally protected, series commutated, through-flow discharge vacuum motor/blower (~½ hp / high-30,000 rpm, low-20,000 rpm) which provides Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4
air velocity of up to 16,000 LFM (linear feet per minute) at the air outlet. Includes a washable metal mesh filter for more reliable performance. b. Heating element (550 W) is constructed of Nichrome wire and mounted inside the blower housing behind air baffle, thereby being vandal resistant. It shall be protected by an automatic resetting thermostat, which shall open whenever air flow is cut off and shall close when flow of air is resumed. It shall produce an air temperature of up to 141°F (61°C) at a 72°F (22°C) ambient room temperature at the outlet and 101°F (38°C) at the hands (4 inches [102 mm] below air outlet). c. Control assembly is activated by an infrared optical sensor located next to the air outlet. The dryer shall operate as long as hands are under the air outlet. Control includes a speed and sound control mechanism, adjustable heat control with High, Medium, Low and Off settings and a filter sensor which is activated should the filter become clogged. There is a 35-second lockout feature if hands are not removed.

Sensor equipped with externally visible Red LED light that can flash error codes to assist in troubleshooting.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.

Provide minimum of six keys.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate OFCI items with City.

B. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

C. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5
END OF SECTION 102800
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - 1
SECTION 104400 - FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Portable fire extinguishers.

2. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:
a. Portable fire extinguishers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets.

1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.

2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For fire-protection cabinets with factory-applied color finishes.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed factory-applied color finish required for fireprotection cabinets, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Size: 6 by 6 inches square.

D. Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - 2

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: 6 years.

B. Installer Warranty: 1 year.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an equal product by one of the other manufacturers specified.

1. JL Industries, Inc. (Basis of Design)

2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.

3. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

4. Ansul.

5. Or equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick minimum.

2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet indicated.

1. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.

3. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and Title 19 CCR.

4. Certification Tag: Provide fire extinguisher with valid certification test tag where fire extinguishers are fully charged and ready to be used.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - 3
B. Wet Chemical Type: Cast steel tank, pressurized, including hose and nozzle, with bracket.

1. Class 2A-K.

2. Size 2.5 gal.

3. Finish: Factory baked enamel, red color.

4. Use: At kitchens.

C. Dry Chemical Type: Cast steel tank, with pressure gage.

1. Class 2A-10B:C, UL rated.

2. Nominal Capacity: Provide largest capacity fire extinguisher that will fit in the cabinet, but 5 lbs. minimum.

3. Finish: Baked enamel, red color.

4. Use: General purpose.

5. Products: Cosmic 5E or Galaxy by J.L. Industries.

2.4 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A. Product: Ambassador Series by J.L Industries.

1. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

2. Mounting: Recessed. Provide Semi-recessed where recessed can’t be provided.

3. Door Style: Vertical Duo Door with tempered safety glass.

4. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. a. Provide manufacturer's standard.
b. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.

5. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.

6. Door Lock: Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets.

7. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.
2) Application Process: Silk-screened.
3) Orientation: Vertical.

2.5 FABRICATION
A. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

B. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - 4

2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods.

B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where cabinets will be installed.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights indicated on Drawings.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
FIRE-PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400 - 5
B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.

2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.

3. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

END OF SECTION 104400
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 1
SECTION 131100 – SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. The scope of the work included under this Section of the Specifications shall include swimming pool(s) as illustrated on the Drawings and specified herein. The General and Supplementary Conditions of the Specifications shall form a part and be included under this Section of the Specifications. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall provide all supervision, labor, material, equipment, machinery, plant and any and all other items necessary to complete the work. ALL OF THE WORK IN SECTIONS 131100 - 131108 IS TO BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF ONE

EXPERIENCED SWIMMING POOL SUBCONTRACTOR PRIMARILY ENGAGED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF COMMERCIAL PUBLIC-USE SWIMMING POOLS. A SWIMMING

POOL SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL BE CONSIDERED PRIMARILY ENGAGED AS REQUIRED HEREIN IF THE SUBCONTRACTOR DERIVED 50% OF ITS ANNUAL

REVENUE FROM PUBLIC-USE SWIMMING POOL CONSTRUCTION FOR EACH OF THE LAST FIVE YEARS. THE SUBCONTRACTOR MUST HAVE ALSO, IN THE LAST FIVE YEARS CONSTRUCTED AT LEAST FIVE (5) COMMERCIALLY DESIGNED MUNICIPAL

AND PUBLIC-USE SWIMMING POOLS, EACH OF WHICH SHALL HAVE INCORPORATED A MINIMUM SIZE OF 6,000 SQUARE FEET OF WATER SURFACE

AREA WITH A CONCRETE AND CERAMIC TILE PERIMETER OVERFLOW GUTTER AND SELF-MODULATING BALANCE TANK. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall furnish and install the swimming pool structures, finishes, cantilever forming, swimming pool mechanical and electrical systems, and all accessories necessary for a complete, functional swimming pool system, as herein described. Work shall include start-up, instruction of Owner’s personnel, as-built drawings and warranties as required.

1.2 CODES, RULES, PERMITS, FEES
A. The swimming pools shall be constructed in strict accordance with the applicable provisions set forth by authorities having jurisdiction over swimming pool construction and operation in the State of California.

B. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall give all necessary notices, obtain all permits, and pay all government sales taxes, fees, and other costs in connection with their work; file all necessary plans, prepare all documents and obtain all necessary approvals of governmental departments having jurisdiction; obtain all required certificates of inspection for their work and deliver same to the Designated Representative before request for acceptance and final payment for the work.

C. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall include in the work any labor, materials, services, apparatus, or drawings in order to comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether or not shown on Drawings and/or specified.

D. The Contractor shall submit all required documents and materials to all Governmental Departments having jurisdiction for any deferred approval items or substituted materials or products to obtain final approval to installation.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 2

1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Furnish and perform supervision, coordination, all layout, formwork, excavation, hand trim, disposing off-site of all unused material or debris to complete the swimming pool excavation to the dimensions shown on the plans.

B. Furnish and install complete swimming pool structures, including reinforcing steel and cast-inplace or pneumatically placed concrete walls and floors.

C. Furnish and install swimming pool finishes, including ceramic tile and marble plaster or other waterproof finishes.

D. Furnish and install complete swimming pool mechanical system(s), including, but not limited to, circulation systems, filtration systems, pool water heating systems, water chemistry control systems, domestic water fill line systems, booster pump and special effects systems, and all pumps, piping, valves, and connections between system(s) and swimming pool(s).

E. E.Furnish and install complete swimming pool electrical system(s) from P.O.C. in Mechanical Room, including, but not limited to, underwater lighting systems, water level control systems, timing systems, scoreboards, special effects systems, control circuitry, motor starters, time clocks, bonding, and all conduits, conductors, contactors, and switches between the system(s) and swimming pool(s).

F. Furnish and install all swimming pool cantilever forming, deck equipment and required anchors and inserts for the specified equipment as required by code, shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

G. After the initial filling of the swimming pool system(s), should any repairs, continuing work, or other Subcontractor responsibility require drainage or partial drainage of the swimming pool systems, the Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall be responsible for any subsequent refilling and shall complete the project with the swimming pool system(s) full of water, water in chemical balance, complete in every way, and in full operation.

1.4 ASSIGNED RESPONSIBILITIES AND RELATED WORK
A. It is the intent of this section of the Specifications to clarify Work responsibilities of the trades directly and indirectly involved in construction of the pool systems. All labor, equipment, materials and supplies furnished by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor and other Subcontractors shall be as directed by the Owner through their Designated Representative.

B. THE SWIMMING POOL SUBCONTRACTOR SHALL NOT SUBCONTRACT ANY

PORTION OF THE SWIMMING POOL CONSTRUCTION OR SWIMMING POOL

EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION TO ANYONE OTHER THAN A SUBCONTRACTOR THAT SATISFIES THE REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 131100
C. References to “swimming pool systems” shall include the swimming pools, equipment, and accessories.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 3
D. The Owner will provide one complete water filling of the swimming pool(s), but will not assume any responsibility for the swimming pool system(s) until they have been proved fully operational, complete in every way and accepted by the Designated Representative.

1.5 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR
A. The Contractor shall grade the swimming pool site(s), establish benchmarks, cut and fill as necessary to provide as level an area as possible at swimming pool deck elevation before swimming pool layout.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for horizontal dimensions and grade elevations accurately from established lines and benchmarks (as indicated on the Drawings) and be responsible for those grades.

C. The Contractor shall provide adequate temporary light, electric power, heat and ventilation per Federal and State OSHA requirements to construct the swimming pool system(s).

D. The Contractor shall not permit any heavy equipment activity over any area or within five (5) feet of any area under which swimming pool piping is buried. There shall be no exceptions to this requirement.

E. The Contractor shall keep the swimming pool excavation(s) and swimming pool structure(s) free of construction residue and waste materials of their workmen or Subcontractors, removing said material from the swimming pools as required.

F. The Contractor shall protect the swimming pool(s) from damage caused by their construction equipment and /or workmen and Subcontractors.

G. The Contractor shall provide a representative at time of swimming pool start-up to coordinate all trades related to swimming pool system(s).

1.6 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE MECHANICAL SUBCONTRACTOR
A. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall be licensed in the State of California and provide written notifications to Swimming Pool Subcontractor and contractor when necessary to excavate and backfill within the swimming pool construction site.

B. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall not utilize any swimming pool piping trench for installation of any sanitary sewer, storm sewer, domestic water, hot water, chilled water or natural gas line.

C. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all sanitary sewer piping, including vent stacks (if necessary), for backwash pits, floor drains and floor sinks as required by code, shown on Drawings, and herein specified.

D. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all storm sewer piping and site drainage systems as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified.

E. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide a minimum 75 psi water supply for swimming pool construction work within fifty (50) feet of the swimming pool construction site(s).

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 4
F. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install reduced pressure backflow protected domestic water lines to P.O.C. within swimming pool Mechanical Room as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified.

G. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install natural gas piping, pressure regulation and valving to P.O.C. within swimming pool Mechanical Room as required by code, shown on the drawings, and herein specified.

H. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all ductwork, louvers, and all HVAC equipment within swimming pool Mechanical Room as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified.

I. The Mechanical Subcontractor shall provide a representative at time of swimming pool start-up to coordinate work related to swimming pool system(s).

1.7 RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE ELECTRICAL SUBCONTRACTOR
A. The Electrical Subcontractor shall be licensed in the State of California and shall furnish and install electrical service to swimming pool Mechanical Room sized to accommodate all necessary swimming pool equipment as shown on the Drawings and herein specified.

B. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish any temporary power needed by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor within fifty (50) feet of the swimming pool construction site(s).

C. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all conduits, conductors, starters/disconnects, panels, circuits, switches and equipment as required for lighting, ventilation and HVAC equipment within swimming pool Mechanical Room as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified.

D. The Electrical Subcontractor shall furnish and install all conduits, conductors, panels, circuits, switches and equipment for area lighting as required by code, shown on the Drawings, and herein specified.

E. All equipment, material and installation shall be as required under Division 16 of the Specifications and shall conform to NEC Article 680 (latest revision), State and Local Codes, and as may be required by all authorities having jurisdiction over swimming pool construction within the State of California.

F. The Electrical Subcontractor shall provide a representative at time of swimming pool start-up to coordinate work related to swimming pool system(s).

1.8 INTENT
A. It is the intention of these specifications and Drawings to call for finished work, tested and ready for operation. Wherever the work “provide” is used, it shall mean “furnish and install complete and ready for use.”
B. Minor details not usually shown or specified, but necessary for proper installation and operation, shall be included in the work, the same as if herein specified or shown.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 5

1.9 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Provide a Schedule of Values for all work specified in each of the technical specifications listed in the table below, regardless of whether the work is performed by the swimming pool contractor or others. Values listed shall be fully burdened, with contractor general conditions, overhead, profit and bonds included. Payments for swimming pool work completed shall not be approved until Schedule of Values has been submitted to and approved by Architect.

SWIMMING POOL SCHEDULE OF VALUES
No. Section # Description Value

1. 131101 Swimming Pool Excavation

2. 131102 Swimming Pool Concrete

3. 131103 Swimming Pool Shotcrete

4. 131104 Swimming Pool Ceramic Tile

5. 131105 Swimming Pool Plaster

6. 131106 Swimming Pool Equipment

7. 131107 Swimming Pool Mechanical

8. 131108 Swimming Pool Electrical
Total

1.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Subcontractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing submittals with performance construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for schedules performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for re-submittals as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal.

1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contract when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow twenty-one (21) days for initial review of each submittal.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 6

3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Subcontractor.

4. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

5. Allow fifteen (15) days for processing each submittal.

6. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.

E. Identification: Place a title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on title block.

2. Provide a space on title block to record Subcontractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information on title block for processing and recording action taken:
(See Attached Sample)
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Name and address of Subcontractor.
d. Name of Subcontractor.
e. Name of Supplier.
f. Name of Manufacturer.
g. Unique identifier, including revision number.
h. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Other necessary identification.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 7
SUBMITTAL FOR: SUBMITTAL TO: SUBCONTRACTOR:

Item Number:

Section Number:

Section Description:

Subcontractor:

Supplier:

Manufacturer:

Product Code:

Quantity:

Subcontractor Certification: Contractor's Submittal Stamp:

It is hereby certified that the equipment or material
designated in this submittal is proposed to be
incorporated in the above named project and is in
compliance with the contract drawings and / or
specifications and is submitted for approval.

Certified by:

Date:

Job
Superintendent:

Revisions:

Architect's Review Stamp and Comments
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 8
F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract documents on submittal.

G. On all catalogue or cut sheets identify which model or type is being submitted.

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Product data and shop drawings shall be packaged within a three-ring binder and colored samples shall be packaged on a heavy cardboard. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form.

1. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Subcontractor's letterhead, record relevant information, request for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals and deviations from requirements of the Contract documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.

2. Include Subcontractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requires of the Contract Documents.

3. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:
a. Project name.
b. Date.
c. Destination (To:).
d. Source (From:).
e. Names of Subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.
f. Category and type of submittal.
g. Submittal purpose and description.
h. Remarks.

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, Subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction.

1.11 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. To obtain approval to use unspecified products, bidders shall submit requests for substitution at least ten (10) days prior to bid date. Requests shall only be considered if they clearly describe the product for which approval is asked, including all data necessary to demonstrate acceptability.

All unspecified products and equipment will be considered on an “or equal” basis at the discretion of the Designated Representative. Requests for substitution received after the specified deadline will not be considered. Where a conflict exists between the requirements of the General Conditions / Special Conditions / Division 1 concerning substitutions and the requirements of this Article, this Article (Section 131100, Article 1.10) shall govern.

B. Where the Swimming Pool Subcontractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that specified or detailed on the Drawings which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions, foundations, piping, wiring, or any other part of the architectural, mechanical, or electrical layout, all such redesign and all new drawings (stamped by California Licensed Engineer) and detailing required shall be prepared by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor, at their own expense, submitted for review and approval by the Designated Representative prior to bid.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 9
C. Where such approved deviation requires a different quantity and arrangement of piping, supports and anchors, wiring, conduit, and equipment from that specified or indicated on the Drawings, the Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall furnish and install any such piping, structural supports, controllers, motors, starters, electrical wiring and conduit, and any other additional equipment required by the system, at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.12 SURVEYS AND MEASUREMENTS
A. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall base all measurements, both horizontal and vertical, from benchmarks established by the Contractor. All work shall agree with these established lines and levels. The mechanical Drawings do not give exact details as to elevations of piping, exact locations, etc. and do not show all offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details.

Verify all measurements at site and check the correctness of same as related to the work.

1.13 DRAWINGS
A. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of the systems and work included in the Subcontractor. Drawings are not to be scaled. The architectural drawings and details shall be examined for exact dimensions. Where they are not definitely shown, this information shall be obtained from the Designated Representative.

1.14 SWIMMING POOL SUBSUBCONTRACTOR
A. The swimming pool construction work as herein described and specified in Division 13 of the Project Manual shall be the complete responsibility of a qualified and specifically licensed (C-53 license classification within the State of California) Swimming Pool Subcontractor with extensive experience in commercial public use swimming pool installations.

B. The Contractor shall require the Swimming Pool Subcontractor to furnish to the Contractor performance and payment bonds in the amount of 100% of the Swimming Pool Subcontractor’s bid written by a surety Company properly registered in the State of California and listed by the U.S. Treasury. The expense of the bond(s) is to be borne by the Subcontractor. The Contractor shall clearly specify the amount and requirements of the bond(s) in the Contractor’s written or published request for subbids. The Contractor’s written or published request for subbids shall also specify that the bond(s) expense is to be borne by the Subcontractor.

C. Subcontractor certifies that it meets the qualifications and experience requirements established in Swimming Pool General Requirements, Section 131100, as follows:

1. Subcontractor has derived 50% of its annual revenue from public-use swimming pool construction for each of the last five (5) years.

2. Subcontractor has, in the last five (5) years, constructed at least five (5) commercially designed municipal and public-use swimming pools, each of which have incorporated a minimum size of 6,000 square feet of water surface area with a concrete and ceramic tile perimeter overflow gutter and self-modulating balance tank.

3. The following list of projects meet the requirements of section (b) above and the contact as reference by the Contractor, the Awarding Authority of their agent or designee. a. Owner:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 10
Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:
b. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:
c. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:
d. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:
e. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:

D. Swimming Pool Deck Subcontractor other than the swimming pool Subcontractor certifies that it meets the qualifications and experience requirements established in Swimming Pool General Requirements, Section 131100, as follows:

1. Subcontract has, in the last five (5) years, constructed at least five (5) commercially designed cantilevered pool decks over perimeter gutters, each of which have incorporated a minimum size of 6,000 square feet of water surface area of the swimming pool.

2. The following list of projects meet the requirements of section (b) above and the contact as reference by the Contractor, the Awarding Authority of their agent or designee. a. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:
b. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 11
c. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:
d. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:
e. Owner:

Scope of Project:

Contact Person:

Phone Number:

Architect for Project:

1.15 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
A. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall determine from actual samples of pool water supplied by the Owner, the proper water management program necessary for maximum operating efficiency and comfort. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall provide the services of experienced personnel familiar with this type of pool system operation, in conformance with Section 131105 of the Specifications.

1.16 MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall provide six (6) bound sets for delivery to the Designated Representative of instructions for operating and maintaining all systems and equipment included in this Contract. Manufacturer’s advertising literature or catalog pictures will not be acceptable for operating and maintenance instructions.

B. Bound in ring binders shall be all parts lists, periodic maintenance instructions and troubleshooting guidelines for all pool equipment, including but not limited to filters, pumps, controllers, water chemistry control equipment, etc.

1.17 SECURE FROM THE OWNER
A. A complete Owner-furnished filling of the swimming pools.

B. The Owner’s assistance, as specified herein, from the time of start-up until final written acceptance of the swimming pool system(s).

C. Chemicals as required for swimming pool operation after Swimming Pool Subcontractor completes initial water chemistry balance and water treatment during the maintenance period described in Section 131105 of the Specifications.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131100 - 12

1.18 WARRANTY
A. The Swimming Pool Subcontractor shall warrant all swimming pool structures, finishes and systems against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year after the date of acceptance by the Owner. Any repair or replacement required due to defective material or workmanship will be promptly corrected by the Swimming Pool Subcontractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 131100
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL EXCAVATION 131101 - 1
SECTION 131101 – SWIMMING POOL EXCAVATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Finish and fine grading to bring the surface of the ground to the required grades and elevations as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Subgrade improvements and placing of compacted fills.

C. Excavation and backfill for all swimming pool, pool deck, surge chamber and backwash retention tank structural requirements, including footings, foundations, slabs and walls.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Conform with requirements of the General Conditions, and more specifically the following:

1. Comply with California Building Code, latest edition.

2. Comply with applicable construction safety orders, latest edition, Federal and State OSHA.

3. Comply with applicable trench safety provisions, latest edition, Federal and State OSHA.

B. Qualifications of Workers:

1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work.

2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years’ experience with the materials and methods specified.

3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years’ experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section.

C. Project/Site Conditions:

1. Be familiar with site and subsurface conditions.

2. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to sub-grade elevations indicated or necessary, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered.

3. Provisions for mitigation of wet soils due to seepage or rain shall be made during aeration and throughout construction. If wet soils are encountered within the swimming pool excavations, de-watering shall be provided and the Geotechnical Engineer shall make recommendations for moist soil mitigation.

4. Where slope instability is encountered, all excavations within those areas shall be 1:1 or flatter. Forming of vertical walls may be necessary, and all soil conditions shall be field verified by the Geotechnical Engineer.

5. Contractor shall review the Geotechnical Investigation Report as furnished by the Owner to determine the suitability of the soils.

6. Refer to General Conditions, Articles 3.17 and 3.18.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL EXCAVATION 131101 - 2
D. Adverse Weather Conditions:

1. During the periods when site soil moisture content is substantially in excess of moisture content required for optimum compaction, do not perform fill compaction.

2. When unfavorable weather conditions necessitate interrupting filling and grading operations, prepare areas by compaction of surface and grading to avoid collection of water. Provide adequate temporary drainage to prevent erosion.

1.3 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Provide submittals in conformance with requirements of Section 013300.

B. Required submittals include:

1. Offsite fill material, if applicable.

C. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.2.B of this Section.

1.4 EXCAVATING & TRENCHING, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to Section 015000, Temporary Facilities and Controls.

B. All trenches, holes, etc. are to be completely protected using solid barricades, steel plates, and plywood both during construction and during off hours, including night time.

C. Flashing warning light barricades are required on sidewalks, roads, and any other critical areas that require night time protection.

D. Roads, paths and sidewalks shall not be blocked at any time or in any way. Trenching across roads, paths or sidewalks involves special instructions and review of the construction procedure by the Owner at least three (3) days prior to the Work actually being started.

E. Construction equipment, including all trucks, cars, etc. shall not be parked or driven on roads, paths or sidewalks. Items not allowed on roads, paths or sidewalks include hoses, power cords, ropes, construction materials, dirt and debris, etc.

F. All roads, paths and sidewalks must remain clear and the Contractor shall maintain temporary safe and effective pedestrian access at all times.

G. Drawings show existing major underground utilities using the best information available. The Contractor shall also fully check public works reference drawings prior to excavation. Call local Dig Alert to locate utilities to ensure safety.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. The Geotechnical Engineer considers existing fill to be non-engineered and unsuitable for support of new improvements. Non-engineered fills can undergo excessive settlement, especially under Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL EXCAVATION 131101 - 3
new fill or building loads. We recommend complete removal and recompaction of the existing fill. We present fill removal recommendations in Section 5.

B. We recommend the existing fill be removed down to competent native soil, as evaluated by the Geotechnical Engineer. The fill shall be removed to at least 5 feet beyond the limits of the proposed improvements, or site boundary, whichever is less. The lateral extent and depth of fill are expected to vary. Consult the boring logs in Appendix A of the Geotechnical Report for fill depths at specific locations. The existing fill may be reused as engineered fill.

C. We recommend the upper 12 inches of the mechanical building pad and pool deck subgrade consist of low expansive material with an expansion index of less than 50. We anticipate the onsite soil will achieve this, however this should be confirmed during grading.

D. The contractor should anticipate encountering excessively over-optimum (wet) soil moisture conditions during winter or spring grading, or during or following periods of rain. Wet soil can make proper compaction difficult or impossible. Wet soil conditions can be mitigated by:

1. Frequent spreading and mixing during warm dry weather,

2. Mixing with drier materials,

3. Mixing with a lime, lime-flyash, or cement product, or

4. Stabilizing with aggregate or geotextile stabilization fabric, or both.

Options 3 and 4 should be evaluated by Geotechnical Engineer prior to implementation.

E. Fill material shall be moisture conditioned to generally at or slightly above the laboratory optimum moisture content prior to placement. The optimum moisture content will vary with material type and other factors. Moisture conditioning of fill soils shall be generally consistent with the soil mass.

F. Compacted fill shall be placed in horizontal lifts of approximately 8 inches in loose thickness.

Prior to compaction, each lift shall be watered or dried as needed to achieve a moisture content generally at or slightly above the laboratory optimum, mixed, and then compacted y mechanical methods, to a relative compaction of 90 percent as evaluated by ASTM D 1557.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify drawing dimensions and elevations with actual field conditions. Inspect related Work and adjacent surfaces and report discrepancies and conditions which prevent proper execution of the Work to the Owner’s Representative. Allow Geotechnical Engineer to sample and test proposed imported fill materials at least 5 days prior to delivery to the site.

3.2 SUBGRADE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Based on results of subsurface evaluation, it is anticipated that the bottom of the proposed swimming pool will be supported by very old paralic deposits. Refusal to drilling with a truckmounted drill rig was encountered as shallow as 5.1 feet below the ground surface in the vicinity of the proposed swimming pool. Accordingly, the contractor shall consider and be prepared to Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL EXCAVATION 131101 - 4
utilize blasting methods to achieve the pool bottom depth. The pool subgrade shall be evaluated by the Soils Engineer prior to placement of reinforcement. In the event the excavation exposes existing fills, expansive clays, or a cut/fill transition at the pool subgrade elevation, it is recommended that the swimming pool be overexcavated as follows. The existing fill materials with proposed pool area shall be removed down to competent very old paralic deposits. The resultant removal surface shall then be scarified to a depth of approximately 8 inches, moisture conditioned to near optimum moisture content, and recompacted to a relative compaction of 90 percent as evaluated by the ASTM D 1557 prior to placing new fill. In the event that the removal surfaces expose competent cobble conglomerate materials, new fill materials may be placed over the exposed conglomerate without scarification.

B. POOL UNDERDRAIN

1. The pool shall include the installation of subdrainage facilities under the shells to protect adjacent improvements against any potential leakage. The subdrainage system shall consist of a minimum 4-inch-thick layer of Class 2 permeable material placed below the pool and outletted in an appropriate location where leakage, can be readily observed. The subdrain outlet shall consist of an initial section of 4-inch-diameter perforated pipe. This pipe shall be completely encapsulated in Class 2 permeable material. The perforated pipe shall change to solid sealed pipe when it leaves the pool vicinity to its approved outlet. If unusual amounts of water are observed flowing from the outlet, the pool shall be checked for leakage and repaired. An acceptable alternative to Class 2 permeable material would be ¾- inch crushed rock enveloped in filter fabric.

C. POOL DECK

1. The pool deck slabs-on-grade shall be well reinforced and designed by the structural engineer. It is our opinion that the pool deck slabs should include a minimum of 4 inches of concrete reinforced with No. 3 bars spaced at no greater than 16 inches on center each way. A minimum 4-inch-thick layer of Class 2 aggregate base shall be provided beneath the concrete deck. A liberal number of control joints should be incorporated in accordance with guidelines by the American Concrete Institute. Exterior pool decks and slabs-on-grade shall be constructed as units that are structurally independent of the pool. This allows the slabs to move with minimum distress to the slabs or the pool.

3.3 EXCAVATION
A. Checking Layout: Contractor shall, before commencing the excavation work, check all lines, stakes and levels for dimensions, angles, elevations and grades with the survey.

B. Dimensions: Excavate to proper dimensions as shown, cut square and smooth with firm level bottoms. Prepared excavations shall be approved by Geotechnical Engineer. Excavations shall be free of loose or disturbed materials.

C. Excess Water Control: Keep all excavations free from standing water by pumping, draining or providing proper protection against water intrusion. If soil becomes soft, soggy or saturated, perform additional excavation to firm soil not affected by water.

D. Form Removal: Make all excavations of sufficient size to permit installation and removal of forms and all other required work.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL EXCAVATION 131101 - 5
E. Alternate Forming: Sides of structures may be formed by neat excavations where banks will stand without caving. If banks cave, provide forming as required and widen excavation to permit forming, bracing and inspection. Provide forming in conformance with Section 131102 and all recognized safety standards. Form all grade beams.

3.4 BACKFILLING
A. Method: After concrete has been placed, forms removed and concrete work approved, backfill the excavations with earth to indicated or required grades. Carry on backfilling simultaneously on each side of walls or grade beams. Remove all rubbish and wood from the excavations before placing backfill.

B. Concrete Protection: Prior to placing any backfill, adequately cure all concrete and provide any bracing required to ensure the stability of the structure. Protect waterproofing and dampproofing against damage in a manner acceptable to the Owner’s Representative. Remove bracing as backfill operations progress.

C. Material: Use the material from the excavations for backfilling, subject to approval by Soils Testing Agency. The earth shall be free from debris, large clods or stones.

D. Lifts: Place backfill in eight (8) inch loose layers, bring to optimum moisture content and compact to ninety percent (90%) of maximum density, sloping down and away from the structures being backfilled.

E. Moisture: Rigidly control the amount of water used to ensure optimum moisture conditions for the type of fill material used. Excessive amounts of water causing saturation of earth will not be permitted. Compaction by flooding or jetting is prohibited.

3.5 GRADING
A. Slopes: Grade to finish grades indicated on Drawings, with uniform slopes between all points.

B. Subgrades: Blade to required grade and roll or tamp subgrades for exterior slabs, decks and paving.

3.6 CLEAN-UP
A. Disposal: Haul away rubbish, debris, and rocks from site promptly and dispose of legally.

Burning rubbish on site is prohibited.

B. Dust and Noise Abatement: During entire period of construction keep area and material being loaded sprinkled to reduce dust in air and annoyance to premises and surrounding property.

END OF SECTION 131101
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 1
SECTION 131102 – SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Forming for cast-in-place concrete and shotcrete associated with swimming pools and pool decks.

B. Reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete and shotcrete associated with swimming pools and pool decks.

C. Cast-in-place concrete for swimming pool structures. Do not use waterproofing admixture of any kind.

D. Cast-in-place concrete for swimming pool decks with Xypex C-500 crystalline waterproofing admixture. Waterproofing admixture for swimming pool decks only.

E. Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install sealant for all pool deck expansion joints, or any other caulking, as indicated on the aquatic Drawings and herein specified.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workers:

1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work.

2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years experience with the materials and methods specified.

3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section.

B. Standards:

1. In addition to complying with the California Building Code (2022 edition), comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in “Guide to Formwork for Concrete" Publication ACI 347R-14 of the American Concrete Institute.

2. In addition to complying with California Building Code (2022 edition), comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in “Guide to Presenting Reinforcing Steel Design Details,” Publication ACI 315R-18 of the American Concrete Institute

3. In addition to complying with all local codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in American Society for Testing and materials (ASTM); ASTM C 920 “Standard Specification for Elastometric Joint Sealants.” C. Tolerances: Construct all swimming pool concrete straight, true, plumb and square within a tolerance horizontally of one in 200 and vertically of one in 2000.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 2

1.3 SUBMITTAL AND SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Provide submittals in conformance with the requirements of Section 013300.

B. Samples and Certificates, Concrete Reinforcement:

1. Provide all data and access required for testing as described in Section 014500 of the Specifications.

2. All material shall bear mill tags with heat number identification. Mill analysis and report shall be made available upon request.

3. Rebar samples shall be taken from bundles as delivered from the mill with the bundles identified as to heat number and the accompanying mill certificate. One tensile test and one bend test shall be made from a sample from each 10 tons or fraction thereof of each size of reinforcing steel.

4. Design mix from batch plant demonstrating previous use history and associated strengths at 28 days.

5. The Contractor shall submit a mix design stamped and signed by a licensed engineer for approval by the Owner’s Representative prior to any placement of concrete.

6. The Contractor shall submit a separate mix design stamped and signed by a licensed engineer for the swimming pool decks which contains the specified Xypex C-500 crystalline waterproofing admixture for approval by the Owner’s Representative prior to any placement of concrete.

C. Submit proof of qualifications as specified in Article 1.2.A of this Section.

D. Submit reinforcing shop drawings for pool walls, gutters, floors, dike walls and balance tank, etc. as shown on the construction drawing.

1.4 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the Project Site in the manufacturer's original unopened containers with all labels intact and legible.

B. Storage: Store materials under cover in a manner to prevent damage and contamination, and store only the specified materials at the Project Site.

C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect the swimming pool concrete before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed Work specified in other Sections.

D. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE FORMWORK
A. Form Materials:

1. Form Lumber: All form lumber in contact with exposed concrete shall be new except as allowed for reuse of forms in Part 3 of this Section, and all form lumber shall be one of the Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 3
following, a combination thereof, or an equal approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative.
a. "Plyform," Class I or II, bearing the label of the Douglas Fir Plywood Association; "Inner-Seal" Form as manufactured by Louisiana-Pacific, or approved equal. b. Douglas Fir-Larch, number two grade, seasoned, surfaced four sides.

2. Form Release Agent: Colorless, non-staining, free from oils; chemically reactive agent that shall not impair bonding of paint or other coatings intended for use.

B. Ties and Spreaders:

1. Type: All form ties shall be a type which do not leave an open hole through the concrete and which permits neat and solid patching at every hole.

2. Design: When forms are removed, all metal reinforcement shall be not less than two (2) inches from the finished concrete surface.

3. Wire Ties and Wood Spreaders: Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders.

C. Alternate Forming Systems: Alternate forming systems may be used subject to the advance approval of the Owner’s Representative.

2.2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
A. Bars: Bars for reinforcement shall conform to “Specifications for Deformed Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement,” ASTM A-615, Grade 60.

B. Wire Fabric: Wire fabric shall conform to “Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete”, ASTM A1064.

C. Tie Wire: Tie wire for reinforcement shall conform to “Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete”, ASTM A1064 black annealed 16-gauge tie wire.

2.3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Concrete:

1. All concrete, unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Owner’s Representative, shall be transit-mixed in accordance with ASTM C94. Concrete for water retaining structures that do not receive a waterproofing finish such as ceramic tile or swimming pool plaster shall receive a topical waterproofing finish.

2. The control of concrete production shall be under the supervision of a recognized testing agency, selected by the Owner in accordance with Section 01 25 00 of the Specifications.

3. Quality: All concrete shall have the following minimum compressive strengths at twentyeight (28) days and shall be proportioned within the following limits a. 4,000 psi minimum compressive strength for cast-in-place concrete swimming pool structures.
b. 4,000 psi minimum compressive strength for cast-in-place swimming pool decks with Xypex C-500 waterproofing admixture.
c. 1” maximum size aggregate.
d. 6.0 minimum sacks of cement per cubic yard.*
e. Maximum water to cement ratio of 0.40-0.45 maximum.
f. 4” maximum slump.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 4
Xypex Admix C-500 2% - 2.5% by weight of cement content. Contact Xypex Technical Services to confirm dosage. (To be used for swimming pool decks only.) * For estimate only: to be determined by mix design.

4. Cement: All cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, Type II or V and shall be the product of one manufacturer.

5. Aggregates:
a. Shall conform to “Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates,” ASTM C33, except as modified herein.
b. Coarse Aggregate: Clean sound washed gravel or crushed rock. Crushing may constitute not more than 30% of the total coarse aggregate volume. Not more than 5% flat, thin, elongated or laminated material nor more than 1% deleterious material shall be present. 1" aggregate graded from 1/4” to 1”, fineness modulus 6.90 to 7.40. 1 1/2” graded from ½” to 1 1/2”, fineness modulus 7.80 to 8.20. c. Fine Aggregate: Washed natural sand of hard, strong particles and shall contain not more than 1% of deleterious material, fineness modulus 2.65 to 3.05. d. Aggregate must be certified, non-expansive from a “known” good source.

6. Water: ASTM1602 Clean, fresh, free from acid, alkali, organic matter or other impurities liable to be detrimental to the concrete (potable).

7. Admixtures: Admixtures shall be used upon approval of the Owner's Representative. a. Air-entraining admixture: Conform to ASTM C260.
b. Water-reducing admixture: Conform to ASTM C494.
c. Waterproofing admixture for swimming pool decks only: Xypex Admix C-500, No substitutions permitted. Conform to ASTM C494.

8. Xypex Admix C-500 Dosage: To be used for swimming pool decks only. a. General: Xypex Admix must be added to concrete mix at time of batching. It is important to obtain a homogeneous mixture of Xypex Admix with the concrete. Do not add dry Admix powder directly to wet mixed concrete as this could cause clumping and thorough dispersion may not occur.
b. Dosage Rate: Under normal conditions, the crystalline waterproofing powder shall be added to the concrete mix at the following rates:
1) Xypex Admix C-500 2% – 2.5% by weight of cement content c. Weather Conditions: For mixing, transporting and placing concrete under conditions of high temperature or low temperature, follow concrete practices such as those referred to in ACI 305R (Hot Weather Concreting) and ACI 306R (Cold Weather Concreting) or other applicable standards.
d. Concrete Batching & Mixing Procedures: Procedures for the addition of Xypex admixture will vary according to type of batch plant operation and equipment. Prior to the placement of any concrete, the concrete batch plant and the contractor shall be responsible to consult with the local Xypex representative concerning additional procedures for the addition, mixing and to confirm dosage.

Note: For enhanced chemical protection or for meeting specific project requirements or where the concrete mix design contains higher than 25% type F fly ash content or includes a portland cement/slag cement/type C fly ash blend, consult with manufacturer or its authorized representative to determine appropriate dosage rates.

B. Construction Joints: Use keyform for slab pour joints. Either preformed galvanized or PVC construction joint forms of a standard manufacturer may be used. Install per manufacturer's recommendations and tool edges of slabs.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 5
C. Waterstops: PVC bulb-type for use between concrete pours / lifts, conforming with ASTM D 570, D 624, and D 638. Provide in configuration(s) as recommended by manufacturer for specific application. Greenstreak, W.R. Meadows, or approved equal.

D. Curing Materials:

1. Liquid Membrane (covered slab): Chlorinated rubber membrane forming, curing-sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309.

2. Liquid Membrane (exposed slab): Clear methyl and butyl methacrylate non-staining, membrane forming, curing-sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309.

E. Cement Grout and Drypack:

1. Cement Grout: Mix 1 part by volume of Portland Cement, 1/2 part by volume of water and fine aggregate enough to make mixture flow under its' own weight.

2. Drypack: Mix 1 part by volume of Portland Cement, 1/2 part by volume of water and fine aggregate enough to make a stiff mix that will mold into a ball. Mix no more than can be used in 30 minutes.

2.4 JOINT SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Caulking: Multipart, non-sag gun grade polyurethane-based sealant meeting the requirements of ASTM C920-02, Type S or M, Mamemco International, Pecora, Sika Corp., Sonneborn Building Products, Tremco or approved equal. Self-leveling caulking materials are not allowed.

B. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

C. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.

D. Sealant Backer Rod: Provide compressible polyethylene or polyurethane backer rod as recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

E. Bond Breaker Tape: Provide polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of sealant.

F. Sand: Cover the surface of the caulking with #30 silica sand.

2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to the advance review by the Owner’s Representative.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Inspection:

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 6

1. Prior to all Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that all Work may be constructed in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations, the referenced standards, the original design, and in accordance with site specific Geotechnical Report.

B. Discrepancies:

1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner’s Representative.

2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3. Failure to notify the Owner’s Representative and give written notice of discrepancies shall constitute acceptance by the Contractor of existing conditions as fit and proper to receive work.

3.2 CONCRETE FORMWORK
A. Construction of Forms:

1. General: Construct all required forms to be substantial, sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of concrete paste, and able to withstand excessive deflection when filled with wet concrete.

2. Layout:
a. Form for all required cast-in-place concrete to the shapes, sizes, lines and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
b. Exercise particular care in the layout of forms to avoid necessity for cutting concrete after placement.
c. Make proper provisions for all openings, offsets, recesses, anchorages, blocking and other features of the Work as shown or required.
d. Perform all forming required for Work of other trades and do all cutting and repairing of forms required to permit such installation. e. Carefully examine the Drawings and Specifications and consult with other trades as required relative to providing for pipe and conduit penetrations, reglets, chases and other items in the forms.

3. Imbedded Items: Set all required steel frames, angles, bolts, inserts and other such items required to be anchored in the concrete prior to concrete being placed.

4. Bracings:
a. Properly brace and tie the forms together so as to maintain position and shape and to ensure safety to workmen.
b. Construct all bracing, supporting members and centering of ample size and strength to safely carry, without excessive deflection, all dead and live loads to which they may be subjected.
c. Properly space the forms apart and securely tie them together, using metal spreader ties that give positive tying and accurate spreading.

5. Wetting: Keep forms sufficiently wetted to prevent joints from opening up before concrete is placed.

B. Plywood Forms:

1. Design: Nail the plywood panels directly to studs and apply in a manner to minimize the number of joints.

2. Joints: Make all panel joints tight butt joints with all edges true and square.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 7
C. Footing Forms:

1. Wood Forms: All footing forms shall be wood unless otherwise specifically approved by the Owner’s Representative, or as specified in paragraph 3.2(C)(2).

2. Earth Forms:
a. Side walls for footings may be of earth provided the soil will stand without caving and the sides of the bank are made with a neat cut to the minimum dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
b. For excavation and backfill of earth forms, conform with applicable provisions of Section 131101.

D. Reuse of Forms:

1. Reuse of forms shall be subject to advance approval of the Owner’s Representative.

2. Except as specifically approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative, reuse of forms shall in no way delay or change the schedule for placement of concrete from the schedule obtainable if all forms were new.

3. Except as specifically approved in advance by the Owner’s Representative, reuse of forms shall in no way impart less structural stability to the forms nor less acceptable appearance to finished concrete.

E. Removal of Forms:

1. General:
a. In general, side forms of footings may be removed seven (7) days after placement of concrete, but time may be extended if deemed necessary by the Owner’s Representative.
b. Forms for footings, foundations, grade beams, slabs, walls, and other formed concrete may be removed fourteen (14) days after placement of concrete.

2. Removal:
a. Use all means necessary to protect workers, passersby, the installed Work of other trades and the complete safety of the structure.
b. Cut nails and tie wires or form ties off flush, and leave all surfaces smooth and clean. c. Remove metal spreader ties on exposed concrete by removing or snapping off inside the wall surface and pointing up and rubbing the resulting pockets to match the surrounding areas.
d. Flush all holes resulting from the use of spreader ties and sleeve nuts using water, and then solidly pack throughout the wall thickness with cement grout applied under pressure by means of a grouting gun; grout shall be one part Portland Cement to 2- 1/2 parts sand; apply grout immediately after removing forms.

3.3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
A. Bending:

1. General:
a. Fabricate all reinforcement in strict accordance with the Drawings. b. Do not use bars with kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings. c. Do not bend or straighten steel in a manner that will injure the material. (When opposite end is already encased in concrete.)

2. Design:
a. Bend all bars cold.
b. Make bends for stirrups and ties around a pin having a diameter of not less than four (4) times the minimum thickness of the bar (#3 - #5) per ACI.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 8
c. Make bends for other bars, including hooks, around a pin having a diameter of not less than six (6) times the minimum thickness of the bar.

B. Placing:

1. General: Before the start of concrete placement, accurately place all concrete reinforcement, positively securing and supporting by concrete blocks, metal chairs or spacers, or by metal hangers.

2. Clearance:
a. Preserve clear space between bars of not less than one and one-half (1 1/2) times the nominal diameter of the round bars.
b. In no case let the clear space be less than one and one-half (1 1/2) inches nor less than one and one-third (1 1/3) times the maximum size of the aggregate. c. Provide the following minimum concrete covering of reinforcement:
1) Concrete deposited against earth: three (3) inches minimum. 2) Concrete below grade deposited against forms: two (2) inches minimum. 3) Concrete elsewhere: As indicated on Drawings or otherwise approved by the Owner’s Representative.

3. Splicing:
a. Horizontal Bars:
1) Place bars in horizontal members with minimum lap at splices sufficient to develop the strength of the bars.
2) Bars may be wired together at laps except at points of support of the member, at which points preserve clear space described above.
3) Whenever possible, stagger the splices of adjacent bars. 4) Splice forty (40) bar diameters minimum.
5) Provide non-contact lap slices for shotcrete.
b. Wire Fabric: Make all splices in wire fabric at least one and one-half (1 1/2) meshes wide.
c. Other Splices: Make only those other splices that are indicated on the Drawings or specifically approved by the Owner’s Representative.

4. Dowels: Place all required steel dowels and securely anchor them into position before concrete is placed.

5. Obstructions: In the event conduits, piping, inserts, sleeves and other items interfere with placing reinforcement as indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required, immediately consult with the Owner’s Representative and obtain approval of a new procedure prior to placing concrete.

C. Cleaning Reinforcement: Steel reinforcement, at the time concrete is placed around it, shall be free from rust scale, loose mill scale, oil, paint and all other coatings which will destroy or reduce the bond between steel and concrete. Bend down all tie wire away from the top of the pool deck.

Maintain a 2” clear from top of concrete to the tie wire.

3.4 SHOTCRETE REINFORCEMENT
A. The maximum size of reinforcement shall be No. 5 bars unless it can be demonstrated by preconstruction tests that adequate encasement of larger bars can be achieved. When No. 5 or smaller bars are used, there shall be a minimum clearance between parallel reinforcement bars of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). When bars larger than No. 5 are permitted, there shall be a minimum clearance between parallel bars equal to six diameters of the bars uses. When two curtains of Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 9
steel are provided, the curtain nearest the nozzle shall have a minimum spacing equal to 12 bar diameters and the remaining curtain shall have a minimum spacing of six bar diameters.

B. Lap splices in reinforcing bars shall be by the non-contact lap splice method with at least 2 inches clearance between bars. The enforcement agency may permit the use of contact lap splices when necessary for the support of the reinforcing provided it can be demonstrated by means of preconstruction testing, that adequate encasement of the bars at the splice can be achieved, and provided that the splices are placed so that a line through the center of the two spliced bars is perpendicular to the surface of the shotcrete work.

3.5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Conveying and Placing Concrete:

1. Before placing concrete, mixing and conveying equipment shall be well cleaned, and the forms and space to be occupied by concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted.

Ground water shall be removed until the completion of the work.

2. No concrete shall be placed in any unit of work until all formwork has been completely constructed, all reinforcement has been secured in place, all items to be built into concrete are in place, and form ties at construction joints tightened.

3. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to place of final deposit in such a way to prevent the separation or loss of ingredients. It shall be placed as nearly as practicable in its’ final position to avoid rehandling or flowing. Concrete shall not be dropped freely where reinforcing bars will cause segregation, nor shall it be dropped freely more than six (6) feet.

Use tremies, spouts and dump boxes in deep sections. Vibrators are not acceptable for facilitating concrete transport.

4. Concrete shall be tamped and spaded to insure proper compaction into all parts of forms and around reinforcement. A mechanical vibrator shall be used to thoroughly compact the concrete. Vibration must be by direct action in the concrete and not against forms or reinforcement.

5. Mixing and transport time as indicated in ASTM C94 is required. If air temperatures are between 85° and 90° F the delivery time is to be reduced to 75 minutes. When air temperatures are in excess of 90° F the delivery time should be reduced to 60 minutes.

6. Truck mixes without batch certificates will be rejected.

B. Construction Joints / Expansion Joints: Construction joints and expansion joints shall be provided at locations and in the manner shown on the Drawings. With exception of existing concrete / new shotcrete joints, use PVC bulb-type waterstops appropriate for design condition between all concrete pours / lifts to avoid cold joints. Waterstops shall be placed in such a way to protect reinforcing steel from rust and oxidation. All expansion joints must be the full depth of the concrete section in which they are located.

C. Slab Finishes: Concrete slabs shall be compacted and screeded uniformly to grades shown. Push large aggregates below the surface with a screen tamper, screed and bull float. As soon as the surface becomes workable, it shall be wood floated, then finished as indicated on the Drawings to a uniform smooth, true surface in a neat and workmanlike manner. Carefully coordinate slab finish requirements with other trades (ceramic tile, pool plaster) to ensure concrete finish is appropriate substrate for final finish material.

1. Contractor shall provide three mock-up deck samples, minimum 3’x 3’, with a wedge anchor installed in one sample. These (3) samples shall be constructed; one with a light broom finish, one (1) with a medium broom finish and one (1) with a heavy broom finish Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 10
for determination and selection of an appropriate deck finish. Each sample shall be edged on all four sides to demonstrate a 3/4” radius edge. Anchor installation shall demonstrate acceptable interface between anchor and the top of deck. Deck samples shall remain on job site through final inspection for reference.

2. Pool Floor Slab: Heavy Wire Broom Finish.

D. Protection and Curing:

1. Concrete shall be protected from injurious action of the elements and defacement of any nature during construction.

2. All forms must be kept wet to prevent drying out of the concrete.

3. All concrete surfaces including footings must be kept wet for at least seven (7) days after concrete is placed.

4. Apply the appropriate curing materials, as specified in 2.3 of this Section, immediately after finishing slabs. Application shall be as specified by the manufacturer.

E. Form Removal:

1. Take care in removing forms so that surfaces are not marred or gouged and that corners are true, sharp and unbroken.

2. No steel spreaders, ties or other metal shall project from or be visible on any concrete surfaces.

F. Defective Work:

1. Should the strength of any concrete for any portion of the work indicated by tests of molded cylinders and core tests fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated, concrete will be deemed defective work and shall be replaced.

2. Concrete work that is not formed as indicated, is not true to intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades or elevations, not true to specified or selected finish, contains sawdust shavings, wood, or embedded debris, which exhibits cracks or contains fine or coarse sulfide particles, or expansive aggregates detrimental to performance or appearance of the concrete shall be deemed defective.

3. Promptly perform work required to replace and properly clean (by sandblasting if necessary) any defective concrete panels (control joint or expansion joint to control joint or expansion joint), at Contractor's expense, including all expense of additional inspection, tests, or supervision made necessary as a result of defective concrete.

3.6 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Temperatures: Do not install sealants when air temperature is less than 40°F.

B. Tooling: Tool exposed joints to a slightly concave surface using slicking materials recommended by the manufacturer. The tooling procedure shall press sealant against the sides of the joint. No materials shall be left “feathered” out or smeared on the abutting materials. Completed joints shall have a uniform professional appearance.

C. Joint Construction: Sealant joint width, thickness and cross-sectional profile to be constructed in strict accordance with the sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.

D. Sand: At the appropriate time cover the sealant with sand to provide a sanded finish.

Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL CONCRETE 131102 - 11

3.7 CLEAN-UP
A. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, immediately remove all swimming pool concrete materials, debris and rubbish occasioned by this Work to the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

END OF SECTION 131102
Not for Construction
For Council Approval
Johnson Pool Phase II Project #23022
City of Roseville
SWIMMING POOL SHOTCRETE 131103 - 1
SECTION 131103 – SWIMMING POOL SHOTCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED
A. Provide labor, materials and equipment as required to install wet mix shotcrete for swimming pool structures as indicated on the Drawings and herein specified.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Workers:

1. The entity performing the work of this Section shall have been successfully engaged in the respective trade for at least five (5) years immediately prior to commencement of the Work.

2. For actual construction operations, use only trained and experienced workers with a minimum of three (3) years experience with the materials and methods specified.

3. Provide at least one person who shall be present at all times during execution of the work of this Section, with a minimum of five (5) years experience with the type of materials being installed, the referenced standards, and who shall direct all Work performed under this Section.